JP2023024643A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can confirm a specific ratio value.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 includes: a main control board 80 that may influence a game result; and a game control microcomputer 81 implemented to the main control board 80. The main control board 80 includes a base indicator 300 capable of indicating base that is a ratio of the total prize ball number that a player has obtained to the shot ball number that is the number of game balls that the player has shot.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 70

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Some pachinko machines are provided with various prize winning openings such as a start opening (ball entry opening), a special winning opening (special winning opening), and a normal winning opening, as described in Patent Document 1 below. The starting opening includes a fixed starting opening in which the ease of entering a ball does not change and a variable starting opening in which the ease of entering a ball can be changed. The variable starting port makes it easier for game balls to enter based on the operation of a normal electric accessory (so-called electric chew). The big prize opening is opened based on the operation of the special electric accessory.

When the flowing game balls enter the winning holes, the player can win prize balls. The number of prize balls that the player obtains when one game ball enters is predetermined for each winning hole. On the other hand, if the flowing game ball enters an out hole different from each winning hole, the player cannot win a prize ball.

JP 2015-208555 A

By the way, in a pachinko game machine, whether or not the base is within a normal range, whether or not the pay rate exceeds a specified value, etc. are inspected in advance. The base (specified percentage value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls won by the player to the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot by the player. The output rate (specific percentage value) is the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of accessories (ordinary electric accessories, special electric accessories, etc.) out of the total number of prize balls obtained by the player. number). If the base or output rate is out of the normal range, the pachinko game machine can give excessive profit or disadvantage to the player. Therefore, by inspecting the base and output rate in advance, an appropriate pachinko machine is installed in the hall.

However, in recent years, among the pachinko machines installed in halls, there have been some that have been illegally modified, or that have abnormal specific percentage values such as the base and output rate due to defects or malfunctions. there were. In other words, there have been pachinko machines in which specific percentage values such as bases and output rates are significantly different from the values when inspected. Therefore, as a countermeasure to the above, a pachinko game machine capable of confirming a specific ratio value is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine that can confirm a specific percentage value.

The present invention employs the following means to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a main board that can affect the outcome of the game;
and a specific control means mounted on the main board,
The main substrate is
and a specific display capable of displaying a specific ratio value, which is the ratio between the number of first specific game balls and the number of second specific game balls.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to check the specific percentage value.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine is open. It is a front view of a game board provided in the gaming machine. It is a front view showing in detail the second big winning device provided in the gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of a game display provided in the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control board and a main board case provided in the gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of a rate indicator provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. (A) is a winning ball counter addition table, (B) is a diagram showing each storage section and each storage area of a game RAM, and (C) is a diagram showing each counter and each storage area of a special memory. is. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each light emission part for games with which a game display is provided. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each lighting part for output rates with which a output indicator is provided. It is a figure which shows the wiring around the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control in a game display. It is a figure which shows the case where the light emission state of each light emission part for a game or the lighting state of each lighting part for an output ratio is cleared. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emission part for a game of a 1st light emission area is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emission part for games of a 2nd light emission area is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd light emission region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emission part for a game of a 3rd light emission area is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case where a 4th light emission region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emission part for games of a 4th light emission area|region is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control in an output rate indicator. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st lighting area|region is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where each output rate lighting section in the first lighting region is lit; It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd lighting area|region is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where each output rate lighting section in the second lighting region is lit; It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd lighting area|region is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where each output rate lighting section in the third lighting region is lit; It is a figure which shows the case where a 4th lighting area|region is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where each output rate lighting section in the fourth lighting region is lit; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a drive circuit of a first comparative example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing dynamic lighting control of a second comparative example; It is a hit classification determination table. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a ready-to-win determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is an electric chew opening pattern determination table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of power-on processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of a number-of-balls counter addition process. 4 is a flowchart of output rate calculation processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing (jackpot game). 9 is a flowchart of output processing; 4 is a flowchart of game display processing; 10 is a flowchart of an appearance rate display process; 10 is a flowchart of an appearance rate display process; 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a clear image displayed on the display screen; It is a figure which shows the out mouth sensor of the modification of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the electrical connection state of the outlet sensor of the modification of a 1st form. (A) is a diagram showing a winning ball counter addition table of a modification of the first form, and (B) is a diagram showing each storage section and each storage area of a game RAM of a modification of the first form. and (C) are diagrams showing each counter and each storage area in a modification of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of input processing of a modification of the first form. 9 is a flowchart of counter addition processing according to a modification of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of base calculation processing in a modification of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of output processing of a modification of the first form; FIG. 9 is a flowchart of base display processing of a modification of the first form; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing of a modification of the first form; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing of a modification of the first form; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing of a modification of the first form; (A) is a diagram showing each storage section, each storage area, and each counter of the game RAM of the second form, and (B) is a diagram showing each storage area of the special memory of the second form. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of power-on processing of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart of the number-of-balls counter addition processing of the second form. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing of the second embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing each storage section, each storage area, and each counter of a game RAM of a modification of the second embodiment, and (B) shows each storage area of a special memory of a modification of the second embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of power-on processing of a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of a 3rd form rotates. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of the 1st modification of a 3rd form rotates. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state in which the rear side case of the second modified example of the third embodiment is slid; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state in which the rear side case of the third modified example of the third embodiment is slid; It is a figure which shows the state which can be attached or detached to the connector of a main-control board|substrate with the external output rate display apparatus of a 4th form. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 4th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of the 4th form. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of output processing of the fourth form; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of input processing of a modified example of the fourth form; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a display mode when the payout rate is not displayed on the payout rate indicator in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a flowchart of output processing of the fifth form; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of display change processing of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of output processing of a modification of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board of a 6th form, and special LED. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of output processing of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of special LED processing of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of output processing of a modified example of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special LED processing of a modified example of the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main-control board and special LED of a 7th form. FIG. 14 is a simple abnormality determination table of the seventh form; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of input processing of the seventh form; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a simple abnormality determination process of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of output processing of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of special LED processing of the seventh embodiment; FIG. (A) is a normal simple abnormality determination table of a modification of the seventh embodiment, (B) is a time-saving simple abnormality determination table of a modification of the seventh embodiment, and (C) is a jackpot of a modification of the seventh embodiment It is a simple abnormality determination table. FIG. 16 is a flow chart of input processing of a modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of simple abnormality determination processing of a modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the eighth embodiment; (A) is the eighth form of winning ball counter addition table, (B) is a diagram showing the variation number counter and each storage area of the special memory of the eighth form, and (C) is the payout of the eighth form. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing each counter of the special memory for the computer; It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for game control of the 8th form performs. It is a flow chart of the payout side timer interrupt processing of the eighth form. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for payout|payout control of 8th form performs. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine in the first modified example of the eighth form; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the first modified example of the eighth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the drive circuit with which the payout control board of the 1st modification of the 8th form is provided. (A) is a diagram showing a winning ball number counter addition table of the second modification of the eighth form, and (B) shows each storage area of the special memory and the variation number counter of the second modification of the eighth form. It is a figure and (C) is a figure which shows each counter of the special memory for payment|payout of the 2nd modification of the 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for game control of the 2nd modification of the 8th form performs. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of input processing executed by a payout control microcomputer of a second modified example of the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 9th form. 29 is a flowchart of game display processing of the ninth form; FIG. 21 is a flow chart of a ninth form of output rate display processing; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of a ninth form of output rate display processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the 10th form. FIG. 22 is a flow chart of a tenth form of output rate display processing; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart of a tenth form of output rate display processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the 11th form. FIG. 22 is a flow chart of a rate display process of the eleventh form; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart of a rate display process of the eleventh form; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a drive circuit of a twelfth form; It is a figure which shows the switch circuit part of a 12th form. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of output processing of the twelfth form; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a twelfth form of output rate display processing; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a twelfth form of output rate display processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the game display device of the 13th form. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a thirteenth form of output rate display processing; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a thirteenth form of output rate display processing; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart of output processing of the fourteenth form; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of output processing of a modification of the fourteenth form; FIG. It is a figure which shows the game display device of another modification. It is a prize ball number counter addition table of another modification. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine of another modification. It is a figure which shows the state which the output indicator of another modification slides. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of power-on processing of another modified example; FIG. It is a figure which shows the game RAM of another modification. It is a figure which shows the outlet sensor of other modifications.

1. Configuration of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine, which is each embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko game machine will be explained as being the same as the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko game machine. Also, the front direction of each part of the pachinko game machine is defined as the direction approaching the player facing the pachinko game machine, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko game machine is defined as the direction away from the player facing the pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 (see FIG. 3) mounted inside the game machine frame 50. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the game machine frame 50 constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko game machine 1, and includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame (glass door frame) 53. As shown in FIG. The outer frame (base frame portion) 51 is a vertically rectangular frame that forms the outer shell of the pachinko game machine 1 . The inner frame (holding frame portion) 52 is a vertically rectangular frame disposed inside the outer frame 51 to which the game board 2 is attached. The front frame (front door portion) 53 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 2 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine frame 50 is configured with a hinge portion 54 on the left end side. The front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 by the hinge portion 54, and the inner frame 52 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the front frame 53. It's becoming An opening 53a is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate (window) 55 is attached to the opening 53a so that the player can visually recognize the game area 3, which will be described later.

The inner frame 52 of the game machine frame 50 is provided with a frame open detection switch (frame open detection means) 50a capable of detecting that the inner frame 52 is open (rotated) with respect to the outer frame 51. ing. Therefore, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame open detection switch 50a does not detect the opening of the inner frame 52 (OFF state). On the other hand, when the inner frame 52 is open with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame open detection switch 50a is in a state of detecting the opening of the inner frame 52 (ON state) and outputs a detection signal. Hereinafter, detection of opening of the inner frame 52 is meant when detection of opening of the game machine frame 50 is described.

The frame open switch (frame open detection means) 50a of this embodiment is a photoswitch (photosensor). However, it may be a switch that detects physical contact with a push button and a spring, a pressure switch (pressure sensor), a proximity switch (proximity sensor), or the like, and can be changed as appropriate. Note that the frame opening detection means is not limited to detecting opening of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51 . For example, the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected, and both opening of the inner frame 52 to the outer frame 51 and opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected. Also good. Further, the location of the frame open detection means is not limited to the inner frame 52, but may be the outer frame 51 or the front frame 53, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower right side of the front frame 53 is provided with a handle (shooting operation means) 60 for shooting a game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. Further, on the lower side of the front frame 53, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 for storing game balls (game media) and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61 are provided. 62 are provided. Around the batted ball supply tray 61, there are provided an effect button 63 and a select button (cross key) 64 which can be operated by the player during effects executed as the game progresses. The select button 64 is composed of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button.

Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 surrounded by rail members 4 in which a game ball shot by operating a handle 60 flows down. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 10). The game board 2 is composed of a plate-like member (game board) arranged on the front side and a back unit (a unit for attaching various control boards, an image display device 7, a harness, etc., which will be described later) arranged on the rear side. It is integrated.

In the game area 3, a plurality of game pegs are projected to change the direction in which the game ball flows. An image display device 7, which is a liquid crystal display device, is arranged near the center of the game area 3. As shown in FIG. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, variable display (variable display) of production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R synchronized with variable display (variable display) of the first special pattern and second special pattern to be described later. There is a production pattern display area for performing. Incidentally, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is called the effect symbol variation effect. The production design fluctuation production is sometimes called "decorative design fluctuation production" or simply "variation production".

The performance symbol display area is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left pattern display area displays a left performance pattern 8L, a middle pattern display area displays a medium performance pattern 8C, and a right pattern display area displays a right performance pattern 8R. Each of the performance symbols is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the To clearly display the result of variable display of a second special symbol (that is, the result of a big winning lottery).

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In addition, when it is a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a separate pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery by the image display device 7 rather than by the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Further, as a form of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, there is a form of scrolling in the vertical direction.

The image display device 7 displays, in addition to the effect pattern variation effect using the above-described effect symbols, a big win effect performed in parallel with the big win game, a demonstration effect for waiting for customers (customer waiting effect), and the like on the display screen 7a. to display. In addition, in the effect symbol variation effect, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are displayed in addition to effect symbols such as numbers.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there is a first effect pending display area for displaying the effect pending image 9A according to the number of storage of the first special pending, which will be described later, and the number of stored second special pending, which will be described later. There is a second effect pending display area for displaying the effect pending image 9B in accordance with. By displaying the effect pending images 9A and 9B, the number of memories of the first special figure pending displayed in the first special figure pending display 43a (see FIG. 5) described later, the second special figure pending display 43b (see FIG. 5) can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decoration 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A stage portion 11 capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting port 20 described later is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . Further, the center decoration 10 is provided with a board movable body 15 that can move in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁In the initial state, the board movable body 15 is in a retracted position that is almost invisible from the front as shown in FIG. The board movable body 15 can be moved from the retracted position to an exposed position (not shown) where most of the display screen 7a is hidden. The movable board 15 is driven by a movable board drive motor 15a (see FIG. 10).

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a first start hole (also referred to as a first ball hole, a first start winning hole, or a fixed ball hole) through which the ease with which a game ball enters is always the same. A first start winning device (also referred to as first ball entry means or fixed ball entry means) 19 provided with 20 is provided. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers lottery for the first special symbol (big hit lottery, ie, acquisition and determination of big hit random numbers, etc.).

In addition, below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, a normal variable winning device (so-called electric Tu) 22 is provided. The electric chew 22 is also referred to as variable ball entry means, second ball entry means, or second starting winning device. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 is an ordinary electric accessory that includes an opening/closing member (movable member) 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the opening/closing member 23 . The opening/closing member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (see FIG. 9). When the opening/closing member 23 is in an open state, entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is possible, and when it is in a closed state, entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is disabled. In other words, the second starting hole 21 is a starting hole in which the ease with which a game ball enters can be changed. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier to enter the second starting port when the opening and closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, the second starter when the opening and closing member is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball into the mouth.

In addition, on the right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device (first special winning means or first special variable winning device) provided with a first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 ) 31 is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member (first special prize opening opening/closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and a special electric accessory that opens and closes the first big prize prize opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. is. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 9). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

In addition, above the first big winning hole 30 in the game area 3, a second big winning device (second special winning means or second special variable winning ) 36 is provided. The second big winning device 36 has an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state, and a special electric accessory that opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37. is. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 9). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, inside the second big winning device 36, a specific area (V area) 39 through which the game ball that has passed through the second big winning opening 35 can pass, and A non-specific area 70 is formed. In the second big winning device 36, upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70, a second big winning hole sensor 35a for detecting the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 is arranged. . In addition, a specific area sensor 39a for detecting passage of a game ball to the specific area 39 is arranged in the specific area 39. As shown in FIG. Further, in the non-specific area 70, a non-specific area sensor 70a for detecting passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 70 is arranged. The second big prize winning device 36 includes a distribution member 71 that distributes game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening 35 to either a specific area 39 or a non-specific area 70, and a distribution member solenoid that drives the distribution member 71. 73.

FIG. 4A shows when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized. As shown in FIG. 4A, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in the first state (passage permission state) that allows passage of game balls to the specific area 39 . When the sorting member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called a first route.

FIG. 4B shows a state in which the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. As shown in FIG. 4B, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in a second state (passage prevention state) that prevents passage of game balls to the specific area 39 . When the distribution member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 passes through the non-specific area 70 after passing the second big winning hole sensor 35a. This game ball route is called a second route.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 triggers a shift to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variable operation opening. On the other hand, the non-specific area 70 is not a probability variable operation opening. Further, the first big winning device 31 is not provided with a specific area as a variable probability operation opening. That is, only non-specific areas are provided.

Returning to FIG. 3 , a gate (also referred to as a passage opening or a passage area) 28 through which game balls can pass is provided above the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3 . Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for execution of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22 . Furthermore, a normal winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . Also, at the bottom of the game area 3, an out port 16 is provided for discharging out of the game area 3 game balls that have been hit into the game area 3 but have not won in any of the winning openings.

In this way, the game area 3 in which various winning holes are arranged includes a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. There is. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting. On the other hand, a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the right hand. , the second flow path R2.

A first starting port 20, a normal winning port 27, and an out port 16 are provided on the first flow path R1. A player can aim to win a prize to the first starting opening 20 or the normal winning opening 27 by hitting a game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1. In addition, the gate 28 is not arranged on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the electric chew 22 will not be released when the player is hitting to the left.

On the other hand, the second big winning device 36, the gate 28, the first big winning device 31, the electric tube 22, and the outlet 16 are provided on the second flow path R2. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can pass through the gate 28, win a prize in the second big prize opening 35, the first big prize opening 30, and the second start opening 21. can be aimed at.

A game display 40 is arranged on the right side of the game board 2 . The game display 40 displays game information based on control processing of a game control microcomputer 81, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 5, the game display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a that variably displays a first special symbol and a second special symbol display 41b that variably displays a second special symbol. ing. The first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight gaming light emitting units (LED elements) LA1 to LA8. The second special symbol display device 41b is composed of eight gaming light emitting units (LED elements) LA9 to LA16.

The game display device 40 also includes a normal symbol display device 42 that displays the normal symbols in a variable manner, and a first special symbol suspension display that displays the number of operations suspended (first special symbol suspension) stored in the first special symbol display device 41a. Device 43a, 2nd special symbol retention indicator 43b that displays the number of memory of operation suspension (second special symbol retention) of second special symbol indicator 41b, and operation suspension of normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol retention) and a normal figure holding display 44 for displaying the number of stored figures. The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two game light-emitting portions (LED elements) LA17 and LA18. The first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two gaming light emitting units (LED elements) LA19 and LA20. The second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of two gaming light emitting units (LED elements) LA21 and LA22. The normal figure holding display 44 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA23 and LA24.

In addition, the game display 40 displays a right-handed display 45 for displaying the right-handed state, a game state display 46 for displaying the current state of the game, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game. A round indicator 47 is included. The right-handed indicator 45 is composed of two gaming light-emitting portions (LED elements) LA25 and LA26. The game state display 46 is composed of three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA27 to LA29. The round indicator 47 is composed of three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA30 to LA32. A total of 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 in the game display 40 are mounted on the game LED board 40a.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as a trigger. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the special symbol. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display device 41. In addition, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation may be collectively referred to as special figure reservation. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 43.

In the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that a lottery (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is performed. Notify the results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (a special pattern of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot pattern (that is, the type of the jackpot won) is used. A big winning game (an example of a special game) is performed to open the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35). The opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big winning game will be described later.

Specifically, the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b is a first special symbol or a second special symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery by the light emitting modes of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16. It displays a pattern. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots to be described later) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 emit light on the first special symbol display device 41a. The jackpot pattern is displayed (see FIG. 16(A)). Also, if the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the second special symbol display 41b displays the lost symbol emitted only by the game light emitting part LA15 (see FIG. 16(B)). A mode in which all the game light emitting parts LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display device 41a and all the game light emitting parts LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display device 41b do not emit light may be adopted as the lost symbols. In addition, the lost design is not a specific special design.

In addition, before the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time. It is a mode that each game light emitting part LA1 to LA8, LA9 to LA16 emits light so that the light repeatedly flows on the display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. In addition, the aspect of the variable display is that if the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are not displayed in a stopped state (light emitting display in a specific aspect), the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are displayed all at once. It can be anything, such as blinking at .

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (winning a prize), various random number values (input Ball information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 (see FIG. 9). Specifically, if the ball is entered into the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special figure hold in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a (see FIG. 9). For example, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b (see FIG. 9) as a second special figure reservation. The number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85 has an upper limit, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbols is performed. Even if a ball is entered during execution or during execution of a jackpot game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the entered ball can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. For example, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a or the second special figure reservation indicator 43b, when the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation or second special figure reservation) is "1", the game on the right side Only the light emitting units LA19 and LA21 for light emission (lighting), and when the number of special figure reservations is "2", only the light emitting units for gaming LA20 and LA22 on the left side are made to emit light, and the number of special figure reservations is In the case of "3", the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21, LA22 are blinked, and when the number of special figure reservations is "4", the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21 and LA22 are made to emit light. In addition, in this form, the 2nd special figure reservation is digested preferentially over the 1st special figure reservation. That is, it is configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the first special symbol.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Auxiliary game is played to make it possible. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display device 42 displays normal symbols according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by means of the light emitting modes of the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18. For example, when the lottery result is a win, normal winning symbols emitted by the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are displayed. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the lower gaming light-emitting portion LA17 emits light is displayed (see FIG. 16(C)). A mode in which the game light-emitting portions LA17 and LA18 are not caused to emit light may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. It should be noted that the normal losing design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. As long as the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are not stopped (lighted up in a specific mode), the variable display may be performed in any manner such as flashing all at once.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 86 (see FIG. 9). It is temporarily stored as a normal drawing reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means to determine the normal pattern random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation, and execute the variable display of the normal pattern to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage.

And the number of such normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . For example, when the number of normal-pattern reservations is "1", the normal-pattern reservation display device 44 emits (lights) only the right-side gaming light-emitting unit LA23, and when the number of normal-pattern reservations is "2", , only the left game light emitting unit LA24 is made to emit light, and when the number of normal pattern reservations is "3", the two game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 are blinked so that the number of normal pattern reservations is In the case of "4", the two game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 are caused to emit light.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, a jackpot game can be executed, and the game state can be controlled to a high probability state or a time saving state as described later. During the execution of the jackpot game (jackpot game state), or in a high probability state or a short working time state, more benefits are given to the player by hitting the right than hitting the left, so the right hitting indicator 45 is displayed on the right. It is designed to display that it is in a state to hit. For example, the right-handed display 45 causes the two game light-emitting portions LA25 and LA26 to emit light as an indication of the right-handed state (see FIG. 16(D)). In the normal game state, since left-handed hitting is more likely to give the player more benefits than right-handed hitting, the right-handed hitting indicator 45 is arranged so that the two game light-emitting portions LA25 and LA26 do not emit light. It has become.

Also, the current game state is displayed on the game state display 46 . For example, in the high-probability state, the gaming state indicator 46 causes the two gaming light-emitting units LA27 and LA28 to emit light. In addition, in the time saving state, the gaming state display 46 causes the gaming light emitting section LA29 to emit light. Therefore, the three game light emitting units LA27, LA28 and LA29 emit light in the high probability state and time saving state, and only the game light emitting unit LA29 emits light in the normal probability state and time saving state. In addition, in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state), the game state display 46 does not emit light from the three game light emitting units LA27, LA28, and LA29 (see FIG. 16(D)).

Also, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed on the round indicator 47. - 特許庁However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set to 16R only (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the round indicator 47 causes the three game light-emitting portions LA30, LA31, and LA32 to emit light to indicate the number of rounds (16R) during execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 16(D)).

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is characterized in that it is possible to display the payout rate. The output rate (specific percentage value) is the number of accessories (normal electric accessories, special electric accessories) out of the total number of prize balls won by the player from the time the power is turned on (predetermined start time). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation (the number of prize balls activated with the function, the number of specific game balls). However, the output rate includes the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio, and the number of prize balls operated with the role includes the number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls) obtained based on the operation of all the roles including the normal electric role and the special electric role to the total number of prize balls. The continuous role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive role prize balls) obtained based on the continuous operation of the special electric role to the total number of prize balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained only based on the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is the denominator value (measured value in the denominator) before calculating the output rate. is the numerator value (numerator measurement value) before calculating .

Before the pachinko game machine is installed in the hall, a trial shooting test of game balls is performed for 10 hours. At this time, it is checked that the role product ratio does not exceed 70% (70%) and that the continuous role product ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). That is, it is checked whether the output rate is within the normal range. If the role ratio exceeds 70% or the consecutive role ratio exceeds 60%, it means that the pachinko gaming machine is capable of giving excessive benefits to the player. In this way, pachinko machines that have been judged to be within the normal range by inspection are installed in halls. However, in the past, there have been pachinko machines that have been illegally modified after being inspected, or that have a role ratio of over 70% or a continuous role ratio of over 60% due to breakdowns or defects. It was not possible to completely deny the possibility that

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a payout rate indicator (specific indicator) capable of displaying the payout rate in order to make it possible to determine whether or not it has been illegally modified or has a failure or malfunction. ) 300. This yield indicator (display means) 300 is integrally attached to the rear surface side of the main control board 80, as shown in FIG. The main control board (main board) 80, which will be described in detail later, is a board on which a game control microcomputer 81 capable of executing control processing relating to progress of a game is mounted. By the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81, the payout ratio (accessory ratio or continuous role ratio) is displayed on the payout ratio indicator 300. FIG. The reason why the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 and the payout rate is displayed by the game control microcomputer 81 is as follows.

The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), unlike the sub-control board 90 and the like, which will be described later, is subject to inspection for proper operation in the test. That is, it is ensured that the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 is appropriate. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 81 displays the payout rate, the reliability of the display of the payout rate is high. In short, in order to avoid illegal display of the payout rate itself, the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the payout rate display is performed by the game control microcomputer 81. . As a result, it is possible for a person who checks the turnout rate to grasp the turnout rate as reliable information.

As shown in FIG. 6 , the main control board 80 is housed inside the main board case 400 . The main board case 400 is made of transparent synthetic resin so as not to obstruct the view of the electronic components (integrated circuits, etc.) on the main control board 80 . The main circuit board case 400 is divided into two parts, a rear side case 401 arranged on the rear side and a front side case 402 on the front side. A connector CN2 is attached above the rear surface of the main control board 80. As shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a connector CN1 is attached to the game LED board 40a of the game display 40. As shown in FIG. Therefore, a connector attached to one end of the harness (not shown) is connected to the connector CN1 of the game LED board 40a, and a connector attached to the other end of the harness (not shown) is connected to the connector CN2 of the main control board 80. connected to As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 can output a signal based on the control process to the game display 40 via the harness. As a result, the game display device 40 displays game information by causing the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 7 , the main control board 80 and the main board case 400 are arranged on the back side of the game machine frame 50 . Specifically, the main board case 400 housing the main control board 80 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit (not shown) of the game board 2 inside the game machine frame 50 . Therefore, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the pay rate indicator 300 is impossible to see. On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is opened (the inner frame 52 is opened with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the pay rate indicator 300 can be viewed through the transparent rear side case 401. It is possible to In this way, in order to confirm the payout ratio displayed on the payout ratio display device 300, the gaming machine frame 50 is opened before the game machine frame 50 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 8, the output rate indicator 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment, and has a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) parts, similar to the game indicator 40 (see FIG. 5). . Specifically, the output indicator 300 includes a first lighting area 310, a second lighting area 320, a third lighting area 330, and a fourth lighting area 340 in order from left to right. Each of the four lighting areas (display areas) 310, 320, 330, and 340 has eight output rate lighting units (LED elements) LB1 so as to represent numbers from "0" to "9." to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. Since the 4-series 7-segment display is widely distributed in the market, the use of the 4-series 7-segment display makes it possible to construct the yield indicator 300 at a low cost.

Next, the display on the yield indicator 300 will be described. In the first lighting area 310, it is possible to display the tens digit when displaying the rate of appearance (ratio of character or continuous character) in percent (percentage). For example, when the output rate is 60%, the output rate lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 light up in the first lighting region 310 to display "6" (see FIG. 26 ( A)). In the second lighting area 320, the ones digit can be displayed when the rate of output is displayed as a percentage (percentage). For example, when the output rate is 60%, in the second lighting area 320, the output rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 light up to display "0" (FIG. 26 ( B)).

The third lighting area 330 indicates whether the output rate displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio. In this embodiment, "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330 when the role product ratio is displayed. In other words, if the output rate lighting units LB18 and LB19 are lit, it means that the character ratio is being displayed. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330 (see FIG. 26(C)). In other words, if the output lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are lit, the continuous role ratio is displayed.

The fourth lighting area 340 indicates whether the output rate displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is a valid value or a reference value. Here, the meaning of effective value or reference value will be explained. As described above, the output rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of the role to the total number of prize balls obtained from the time the power is turned on to the present time. If the time during which the player has played the game is short, there is a possibility that the payout rate has not converged. For this reason, a person who confirms the output rate cannot make a correct judgment unless the output rate is displayed as a value that has converged to some extent.

Therefore, in this form, the first condition is that the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is turned on to the present time is "10000" (predetermined number of prize balls) or more, or the special If any of the conditions of the second condition that the number of fluctuations in which the symbol fluctuation display is executed is 3000 (predetermined number of rotations) or more is satisfied, the value (effective value) where the payout rate converges to some extent. I am trying to regard it as Conversely, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is regarded as a value (reference value) in which the output rate has not converged to some extent.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the output rate as a valid value is displayed, "1" (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 (see FIG. 26(D)). That is, if the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is possible to correctly determine the output rate as an effective value that has converged to some extent. On the other hand, when displaying the output rate as a reference value, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. FIG. In other words, if the output rate lighting units LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 are lit, neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is possible to check the output rate as a reference value that may not have converged yet.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control board (game control board) 80 for controlling game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transitions, and a control board for effects executed as the game progresses. A sub-control board (effect control board) 90 for performing control, a payout control board 110 for controlling pay-out of game balls, and the like are provided. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 respectively correspond to main boards that can affect the game results. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 constitute a main control section, and the sub-control board 90 constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the sub-drive board 107, and the sound control board 106 which will be described later. The sub-control unit has at least a sub-control board 90, and can control game effects using the effect means (image display device 7, speaker 67, frame lamp 66, board lamp 5, board movable body 15, etc.). Just do it.

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a power board 150 . A power switch 155 is connected to the power board 150, and ON/OFF operation of the power switch 155 switches on/off of power. The power source is 24V AC power supplied from the power plug 160 to the power supply board 150 when the power plug 160 shown in FIG. The power board (power-on means) 150 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter, and the power required for the operation of the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90, and the payout control board 110 (DC37V, DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) can be supplied, and necessary power can be supplied to other devices via these boards.

A backup power supply circuit 151 is provided on the power supply board 150 . A backup power supply circuit (backup power supply means) 151 provides a RAM 84 and a special memory 89 of the main control board 80, which will be described later, and a sub Power can be supplied to the RAM 94 of the control board 90 . Therefore, the information (stored contents) stored in the RAM 84 and special memory 89 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off. The RAM (volatile memory) 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are volatile storage means (DRAM). The backup power supply circuit 151 has a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 and special memory 89 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80 , or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90 .

A RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear information stored in the RAM 84 for the main control board 80 is mounted on the power supply board 150 . As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and other various control boards including the power supply board 150 are also arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 cannot be operated by anyone other than an employee of the hall who can open the gaming machine frame 50 or a person who confirms (inspects) the output rate. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 are operating means that are substantially impossible for the player to operate. A signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is output from the power board 150 to the main control board 80 . Note that the location of the RAM clear switch 152 is not limited to the power supply board 150, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. A game control microcomputer (main control means) 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of a game, a CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the ROM 83, and a RAM 84 that stores processing information of the CPU 82 as a work memory. , an I/O port section (input/output circuit) 87 for inputting/outputting data and signals, and a special memory 89 used as a work memory for calculating output rates.

The RAM 84 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 85 (a first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and a second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and a general figure reservation storage unit 86, as shown in FIG. Further, in the RAM 84, as shown in FIG. 11B, a first game data storage area, a second game data storage area, and a third game data storage area for storing data information for displaying game information on the game display 40 are stored. A storage area and a fourth game data storage area are provided. The ROM 83 may be external.

A special memory (special storage means) 89 is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the payout rate. As shown in FIG. 11(C), the special memory 89 contains a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball counter, a prize ball counter, a continuous prize ball counter, and a variation counter. , a role product ratio storage area, a continuous role product ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area are provided.

The 100 ball counter (first counter) counts the number of prize balls won by the player one by one, and is reset to "0" when 100 balls are counted (when the count reaches 100 balls or more). It is designed to be The actual total winning ball number counter (second counter) counts by one when 100 balls are counted by the 100 ball counter. That is, the actual total number of prize balls counter is a counter that increases by one each time the number of prize balls reaches 100 balls. In this way, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize-balls counter measure the total number of prize balls paid out from the time the power is turned on to the present time as 1 in units of 100 balls (measurement for 100 balls). means).

The prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based on the operation of the ball from when the power is turned on to the present time. The continuous prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based only on the execution of the jackpot game from the time the power is turned on. The variable number counter measures the number of variable times that the special symbol variable display is performed from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The role product ratio storage area stores the calculated role product ratio. The continuous role product ratio storage area stores the calculated continuous role product ratio. The checksum storage area stores a checksum value calculated for the contents stored in the special memory 89 as will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the payout rate display 300 displays the payout rate (character product ratio or continuous character product ratio) as a two-digit percentage (percent) integer (for example, "60"). This is because if the output rate is displayed using a decimal point such as "0.60", the integer "0" and the decimal point must also be displayed, increasing the number of digits to be displayed. The reason why three or more digits are not displayed is that there is almost no need for those who check the output rate to grasp detailed values of three or more digits.

By the way, when trying to calculate the role ratio as a percentage value, in general, the number of prize balls is divided by the total number of prize balls, which is the value measured in units of one ball, and then multiplied by 100. We can think of a way to do this. However, the division process requires a program to check whether it is divided by "0" or whether there is a shift in the digit position. This process has a large load. Especially in the case of the above method, the value of the total number of prize balls, which is the denominator, is larger than the value of the number of prize balls, which is the numerator, so that the adjustment of the digit positions in division becomes complicated in terms of software. In other words, in software division processing, subtraction processing is repeatedly performed, and if the value of the denominator is greater than the value of the numerator, the processing becomes complicated due to the adjustment of the digit position.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a 100-ball counter and an actual total prize-ball counter are used to measure the total number of prize-balls as one in 100-ball units. As a result, when calculating the role ratio as a percentage value, the actual total prize ball counter value (total prize ball number is 100 balls value measured as one unit). As a result, the value of the denominator becomes smaller than the value of the numerator, making it possible to simplify the software processing during division. Furthermore, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a 100-ball counter (first counter) that can be reset to "0" when 100 balls are counted, and an actual counter that can count one ball for every 100 balls counted by the 100-ball counter. A total winning ball counter (second counter) is used. Therefore, it is possible to perform calculation processing of the output rate with the 2-byte value as it is. That is, a counter used in an ordinary pachinko game machine can count a 2-byte value (a value from 0 to 65535). However, if an attempt is made to count the total number of prize balls in units of one ball using only one counter, the total number of prize balls exceeds 65,535 as the game progresses, and cannot be treated as a 2-byte value. Gone. Therefore, by using two counters, the counter for 100 balls and the counter for the total number of actual prize balls, it is possible to count up to 6,553,500 balls, which is 100 times the total number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to handle the 2-byte value as it is in terms of calculation of output rate. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 can calculate the output rate in units (2 bytes) that are easy to handle, and it is possible to avoid complication of the calculation process.

In the above description, when calculating the role ratio, the value of the prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter. simply divides the value of the number of consecutive prize balls by the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those described above, and the same description will be omitted. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the calculated character product ratio as a percentage value in the character product ratio storage area of the special memory 89, and stores the calculated continuous character product ratio as a percentage value in the special memory 89. It is designed to be stored in an area.

In this embodiment, unlike the information stored in the RAM 84, the information stored in the special memory 89 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. That is, the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically not erased after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time. Therefore, the output rate (role product ratio or continuous role ratio) calculated in this embodiment means that the total number of prize balls from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned on until the present time is It means the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls). The reason why the special memory 89 is provided separately from the existing RAM 84 and the contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased is as follows.

As described above, until the output rate reaches a value (effective value) that converges to some extent, the game is sufficiently played by the player, and the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls activated with the accessory become large values. need to be However, it is quite possible that the number of fluctuations is less than 3000 rounds and the total number of prize balls is less than 10000 even after one day has passed. In this case, by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on the next day, the information (total number of prize balls, number of prize balls, number of continuous prize balls, number of fluctuations, etc.) for temporarily calculating the output rate is cleared. If it is cleared, there is a possibility that the output rate as a valid value cannot be calculated forever. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased, thereby making it possible to calculate the output rate as an effective value. In particular, since the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically never erased, the longer the game period is, for example, one month or more, the more converged the payout ratio becomes. It is possible to calculate

The special memory 89 of this embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot retain the stored contents when power is no longer supplied. However, as described above, power (backup power) can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 of the power supply board 150 to the special memory 89 when the business is closed or there is a power failure such as a power failure. Therefore, if the power is cut off for several days, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased.

Returning to the description of the electrical configuration on the side of the main control board 80 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 80 is provided with a drive circuit 200 . The drive circuit 200 is a circuit for displaying game information on the game display device 40 based on a signal (data information) output from the game control microcomputer 81, and displays a payout ratio on the payout ratio display unit 300. is a circuit for displaying The configuration of drive circuit 200 will be described in detail later.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the non-specific sensor. A region sensor 70a and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected. Further, the main control board 80 is connected with a frame open detection switch 50a, and a detection signal from the frame open detection switch 50a can be input to the game control microcomputer 81.

The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. As shown in FIG. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. As shown in FIG. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided in each normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27.例文帳に追加

Also, as the solenoids, the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the sorting member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric tuner solenoid 24 drives the opening/closing member 23 of the electric tuner 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . The distribution member solenoid 73 drives the distribution member 71 of the second big winning device 36 .

Furthermore, on the main control board 80, the game display device 40 (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b, normal symbol display device 42, first special symbol reservation display device 43a, second special symbol reservation display A device 43b, a normal figure holding display 44, a right hitting display 45, a game state display 46, and a round display 47) are connected. Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring.

The payout control board 110 includes a prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, enabling ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card). ) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111 . Launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 7, the payout control board 110 is arranged below the main control board 80 and surrounded by a payout board case 500 made of transparent synthetic resin.

The payout control board (main board) 110 mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “payout control microcomputer”) 116 capable of executing control processing related to the payout of game balls according to a program. A payout control microcomputer (payout control means) 116 includes a ROM 118 storing a program for controlling payout, a RAM 119 used as a work memory, a CPU 117 executing the program stored in the ROM 118, and inputting/outputting data and signals. It includes an I/O port section (input/output circuit) 109 for performing Note that the ROM 118 may be externally attached.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal (prize ball command) from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor 122 is output to the payout control board 110 . In this embodiment, the number of winning balls to be awarded to the normal winning opening 27 is 8 balls. Also, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting hole 20 is three balls, and the number of prize balls for winning the second starting hole 21 is seven balls. The number of prize balls for winning the first big prize opening 30 is 15, and the number of prize balls for winning the second big prize opening 35 is 15 (see FIG. 11(A)). Note that the number of winning balls into each winning hole is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 116 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the lending ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 to pay out the lending balls. The balls to be paid out are detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting, and a detection signal from the ball rental sensor 132 is output to the payout control board 110 . When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 . In this pachinko game machine 1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "effect control microcomputer") 91 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer (performance control means) 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes the program stored in the ROM 93. , an I/O port section (input/output circuit) 97 for inputting/outputting data and signals. Note that the ROM 93 may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a sub drive board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 .

The image control board 100 includes a ROM 103 storing programs for controlling image display and the like, a RAM 104 used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 executing the programs stored in the ROM 103 . The ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, image data such as characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols (including production patterns) and background images. is stored.

Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 . Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100 .

In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits the frame lamp 66 (light emitting means provided in the game machine frame 50) and the board through the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108. Lighting control of lamps such as the lamp 5 is performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp (LED element). It controls the light emission of the lamp (LED element). Data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 performs drive control of the board movable body 15 via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable board 15, and performs drive control of the movable board drive motor 15a according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data.

Also, the sub-control board 90 is connected with an effect button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 64a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed down, a detection signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the performance button detection switch 63a. The select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the select button detection switch 64a.

9 and 10 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1, and the boards shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are not the only ones provided. Except for the main control board 80, a plurality of boards shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. Connection state between the game display device 40 and the output rate display device 300 and the game control microcomputer 81 Next, the connection state between the game display device 40 and the output rate display device 300 and the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. will be explained based on Therefore, first, based on FIG. 12, the electrical connection state of the game light emitting units (light emitting units) LA1 to LA32 of the game display device 40 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the connector CN1 provided on the game display 40 is provided with 12 pins.

A first common signal line A1, a second common signal line A2, a third common signal line A3, and a fourth common signal line A4 are connected to the first to fourth pins of the connector CN1, respectively. A first data signal line Aa, a second data signal line Ab, a third data signal line Ac, a fourth data signal line Ad, a fifth data signal line Ae, a 6 data signal line Af, 7th data signal line Ag, and 8th data signal line Ah are connected respectively.

In the following description, the area of the first special symbol display 41a in which the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 are provided will be referred to as "first light emitting area 410". Also, the area in which the gaming light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b are provided is called a "second light emitting area 420". In addition, each game light emitting portion LA17, LA18 of the normal symbol display device 42, each game light emitting portion LA19 to LA22 of the special figure reservation display device 43, and each game light emission portion LA23, LA24 of the general pattern reservation display device 44 is provided will be referred to as a "third light emitting region 430". In addition, each game light emitting portion LA25, LA26 of the right-handed display device 45, each game light emitting portion LA27 to LA29 of the game state display device 46, and each game light emitting portion LA30 to LA32 of the round display device 47 are provided. The area where the light is emitted will be referred to as a "fourth light emitting area 440".

The first common signal line A1 is connected to each of the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410. As shown in FIG. The second common signal line A2 is connected to each of the gaming light-emitting portions LA9-LA16 of the second light-emitting area 420. As shown in FIG. The third common signal line A3 is connected to each of the game light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting area 430. As shown in FIG. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected to each of the gaming light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting area 440. As shown in FIG. The eight data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah are the eight gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area. 420 of the eight game light emitting units LA9 to LA16, the eight game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting region 430, and the eight game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting region 440, respectively. linked.

With the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32. That is, if one signal line is connected to each of the 32 gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA32 (a total of 32) and static lighting control is performed, the number of signal lines becomes too large. The game control microcomputer 81, which is an 8-bit microcomputer, cannot perform lighting control. Therefore, the number of signal lines is reduced by connecting common signal lines A1, A2, A3 and A4 to each of the light emitting areas 410, 420, 430 and 440 having eight gaming light emitting portions. . In addition, in this embodiment, the light-emitting regions that can emit light among the four light-emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 are sequentially switched every 4 ms. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the human eye that the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 are emitting light at the same time by using the afterimage phenomenon.

An outline of dynamic lighting control will be described. For example, it is assumed that all 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 are emitting light. In this case, first, the voltage of the first common signal line A1 is set to "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage), and the voltages of the other common signal lines A2, A3, A4 are set to "L" level (lower limit voltage). voltage lower than the threshold voltage). Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to "H" level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting area 410, and the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 emit light. Subsequently, 4 ms later, the voltage of the second common signal line A2 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A3, A4 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to "H" level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420, and the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 emit light.

Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the third common signal line A3 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, A4 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to "H" level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting area 430, and the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 emit light. Subsequently, 4 ms later, the voltage of the fourth common signal line A4 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, A3 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to "H" level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting area 440, and the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 emit light. Thereafter, similarly, light emission from the first light emitting region 410 to the fourth light emitting region 440 is repeated every 4 ms. In this way, at a certain moment, although the game light emitting portion emits light only in one of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440, all of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 are visible to the human eye. The game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 appear to emit light.

Next, based on FIG. 13, the electrical connection state of the lighting units (lighting units) LB1 to LB32 for the output ratio of the output ratio indicator 300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the yield indicator 300 includes a first common signal line B1, a second common signal line B2, a third common signal line B3, a fourth common signal line B4, a first data signal line Ba, a A second data signal line Bb, a third data signal line Bc, a fourth data signal line Bd, a fifth data signal line Be, a sixth data signal line Bf, a seventh data signal line Bg, and an eighth data signal line Bh are connected. ing. These signal lines B 1 to B 4 and Ba to Bh are provided on the main control board 80 .

Specifically, the first common signal line B1 is connected to the output rate lighting sections LB1 to LB8 of the first lighting region 310. As shown in FIG. The second common signal line B2 is connected to the output rate lighting sections LB9 to LB16 of the second lighting area 320. As shown in FIG. The third common signal line B3 is connected to the output rate lighting sections LB17 to LB24 of the third lighting region 330. As shown in FIG. The fourth common signal line B4 is connected to the output rate lighting sections LB25 to LB32 of the fourth lighting region 340. As shown in FIG. The eight data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh are composed of the eight output rate lighting portions LB1 to LB8 of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting portions LB1 to LB8. Eight output rate lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the region 320, eight output rate lighting units LB17 to LB24 in the third lighting region 330, and eight output rate lighting units LB25 in the fourth lighting region 340. to LB32, respectively.

With the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 output rate lighting units LB1 to LB32. The dynamic lighting control for the output rate lighting units LB1 to LB32 is the same as the dynamic lighting control for the gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA32 described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

Next, based on FIG. 14, the electrical connection state of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 81 includes 8-bit input/output terminals D0 to D7, an output terminal PO11, an output terminal PO12, an output terminal PO13, and many other terminals (for example, a backup power supply terminal (VBB terminal). Input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the game control microcomputer 81 are connected to the bus line BL, and data information D[0], D[1], D[2], D[3], D[4], D[5], D[6], and D[7] can be input/output. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 can output 8-bit data information D[0] to D[7] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 to the bus line BL.

In the following, data information D[0] to D[7] will be referred to as data information D[0...7], and data information D[0] to D[3] will be referred to as data information D[0...3]. and For example, data information D[0] will be simply referred to as data information D0 without parentheses. In this embodiment, data information D0=“1” means that a signal of “H” level (data information D0) is output, and data information D0=“0” means that a signal of “L” level is output. (data information D0) is output.

The game control microcomputer 81 can output the select signal XCSE0 from the output terminal PO11, can output the select signal XCSE1 from the output terminal PO12, and can output the select signal XCSE10 from the output terminal PO13. The levels of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 to be output are either "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than the lower limit threshold voltage) by the game control microcomputer 81. is set to

Next, based on FIG. 15, the electrical connection state of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the drive circuit 200 includes a light emission selection circuit section 210 and a light emission drive circuit section 220 for displaying game information on the game display device 40 . The driving circuit 200 of this embodiment is characterized in that it includes a lighting selection circuit section 230 for displaying the output rate on the output rate indicator 300 .

The light emission selection circuit unit 210 is a circuit for selecting a light emission region that can be lighted out of the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40 based on the data information D[0...3]. The light emission selection circuit section 210 is composed of a flip-flop (IC1) and a transistor array (IC2).

IC1 includes input terminals 1D to 8D for 8 bits, output terminals 1Q to 8Q for 8 bits, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to input terminals 1D to 4D of IC1, and data information D0, D1, D2, and D3 are inputted respectively. Input terminals 5D to 8D of IC1 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1, respectively. Also, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of IC1 are not connected. A reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of IC1. A select signal XCSE0 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of IC1.

This IC1 is a D-type flip-flop, holds (latches) data information D[0 . . . Information D[0 . . . 3] is output from output terminals 1Q to 4Q. For IC1, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

IC2 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a minute input current, and has input terminals IN1 to IN8 for 8 bits, output terminals O1 to O8 for 8 bits, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have. Input terminals IN1 to IN4 of IC2 are connected to four signal transmission lines S1. Input terminals IN5 to IN8 of IC2 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of IC2 are connected to a first common signal line (first light emission common line) A1, a second common signal line (second light emission common line) A2, and a third common signal line A3. A fourth common signal line A4 is connected. These common signal lines A1 to A4 are connected to the 1st to 4th pins of the connector CN2 and form the same transmission path as the common signal lines A1 to A4 (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40 described above. Also, the output terminals O5 to O8 of IC2 are not connected. For IC2, a general-purpose IC such as "M54562WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

The light emission drive circuit unit 220 emits light from the eight game light emission units in the light emission region selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 out of the four light emission regions 410 to 440 based on the data information D[0...7]. It is a circuit to make it possible. The light emission drive circuit section 220 is configured with a flip-flop (IC3) and a transistor array (IC4).

IC3 has 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of IC3, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6 and D7 are inputted respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of IC3, respectively. A reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of IC3. A select signal XCSE1 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC3.

This IC3 is a D-type flip-flop, holds (latches) data information D[0 . . . Information D[0 . . . 7] is output from output terminals 1Q to 8Q. For IC3, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

IC4 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a minute input current, and has input terminals IN1 to IN8 for 8 bits, output terminals O1 to O8 for 8 bits, and other terminals (COM terminal, GND terminal). I have it. Eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC4. On the other hand, the data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah are connected to the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4. These data signal lines Aa-Ah are connected to the 5th to 12th pins of the connector CN2 via current limiting resistors RR, and are connected to the data signal lines Aa-Ah (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40 described above. become the same transmission path. For the IC4, a general-purpose IC such as "M54585WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

The lighting selection circuit unit 230 is a circuit for selecting a lighting region that can be lit among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300 based on the data information D[0 . . . 3]. The lighting selection circuit section 230 is composed of a flip-flop (IC5) and a transistor array (IC6).

The IC 5 has 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC 5, and data information D0, D1, D2 and D3 are inputted respectively. Input terminals 5D to 8D of IC5 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC5, respectively. Output terminals 5Q to 8Q of IC5 are not connected. A reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of IC5. A select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC5.

This IC5 is a D-type flip-flop, holds (latches) data information D[0 . . . Information D[0 . . . 3] is output from output terminals 1Q to 4Q. For the IC 5, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used.

IC6 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a very small input current, and has 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have it. Four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6. Input terminals IN5 to IN8 of IC6 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 6 are connected to a first common signal line (first lighting common line) B1, a second common signal line (second lighting common line) B2, and a third common signal line B3. A fourth common signal line B4 is connected. These common signal lines B1 to B4 are the same transmission paths as the common signal lines B1 to B4 (see FIG. 13) of the yield indicator 300 described above. Output terminals O5 to O8 of IC6 are not connected. For the IC 6, a general-purpose IC such as "M54562WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

In this embodiment, data signal lines (branch data lines) Ba to Bh are provided so as to branch from the eight data signal lines (data lines) Aa to Ah arranged between the IC4 and the connector CN2. ing. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are the same transmission paths as the data signal lines Ba to Bh (see FIG. 13) of the yield indicator 300 described above. In this way, the signals output from the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4 can be transmitted to the game display device 40 via the data signal lines Aa to Ah, and can also be transmitted to the pay rate display device 300 via the data signal lines Ba to Bh. It's becoming

4. Dynamic Lighting Control by Game Control Microcomputer 81 Next, dynamic lighting control by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 34. FIG. Therefore, first, based on FIGS. 16 to 25, the case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the game display device 40 will be described. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 16A, the gaming light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410. FIG. That is, the big hit design is displayed on the first special design display 41a. Next, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the gaming light emitting portion LA15 is caused to emit light in the second light emitting area 420 . That is, the second special symbol display 41b displays the missing symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 16(C), the gaming light emitting units LA17 and LA20 are caused to emit light in the third light emitting area 430 . In other words, the normal symbol display 42 displays normal losing symbols, and the first special symbol reservation display 43a displays that there is one first special symbol reservation. Next, as shown in FIG. 16D, the gaming light emitting units LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, and LA32 are caused to emit light in the fourth light emitting area 440. FIG. That is, the right-handed display 45 displays that the player should hit right, and the round display 47 displays that the number of rounds is 16R.

It should be noted that FIG. 17 shows a case in which the light emission state of each game light emitting portion is once cleared. This is done so that when each game light-emitting portion in a certain light-emitting region of the game display 40 is caused to emit light, the light-emitting state of each game light-emitting portion emitted in the previous light-emitting region (4 ms before) is not reflected. It is for In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000000] as shown in FIG. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[00000000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of all the eight signal transmission lines S2 become "L" level. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of all the eight data signal lines Aa-Ah to the "L" level and does not pass the drive current to the eight gaming light emitting units. In this way, the light emitting state of each game light emitting portion is cleared. In addition, since the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 is the same in the case of once clearing the lighting state of each output lighting unit, the explanation is omitted.

In the above-described example, the game control microcomputer 81, when the first light emitting region 410 is the light emitting region that can be emitted among the four light emitting regions 410 to 440, the previous (4 ms ago) light emission in the fourth light emitting region 440 First, the light emission state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 18, data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[1000] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [HLLL]. Thus, the first light emitting region 410 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11001100]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[11001100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLHHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLHHLL] to flow the driving current. In this way, the gaming light emitting sections LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 emit light in the first light emitting area 410 (see FIG. 16A).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the second light emitting area 420 the light emitting area that can be lighted out of the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 . In this case, first, the light emission state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the previous light emission state (4 ms before) in the first light emission region 410 . Next, as shown in FIG. 20, data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0100] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LHLL]. Thus, the second light emitting region 420 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0 to 7]=D[00001000]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[00001000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LLLLHLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [LLLLHLLL] to allow the drive current to flow. In this way, the game light emitting portion LA15 emits light in the second light emitting area 420 (see FIG. 16(B)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the third light emitting area 430 the light emitting area that can be lighted among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 . In this case, first, the light emission state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emission state of the second light emission region 420 last time (4 ms ago). Next, as shown in FIG. 22, data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0010] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLHL]. Thus, the third light emitting region 430 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[10010000]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[10010000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLLHLLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HLLHLLLL] to pass the drive current. In this way, the gaming light emitting sections LA17 and LA20 emit light in the third light emitting area 430 (see FIG. 16(C)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the fourth light emitting region 440 the light emitting region that can be lighted out of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 . In this case, first, the light emission state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emission state of the third light emission region 430 last time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 24, data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0001] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLLH]. Thus, the fourth light emitting region 440 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11000111]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[11000111] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLLHHH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLLHHH] to flow the driving current. In this way, the gaming light emitting units LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, and LA32 emit light in the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 16(D)). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 controls light emission in the first light emission region 410, light emission control in the second light emission region 420, light emission control in the third light emission region 430, and fourth light emission as described above every 4 ms. The light emission control in area 440 is repeated.

Next, a case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the output indicator 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 34. FIG. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 26A, the output rate lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit in the first lighting area 310. FIG. That is, “6” is displayed in the first lighting area 310 . Next, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the second lighting area 320, the lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 for output rate are turned on. That is, “0” is displayed in the second lighting area 320 . Next, as shown in FIG. 26(C), in the third lighting area 330, the output rate lighting sections LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are turned on. That is, “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330 . Next, as shown in FIG. 26D, in the fourth lighting area 340, the lighting units LB26 and LB27 for output rate are turned on. That is, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 .

In the above-described example, the game control microcomputer 81, when the first lighting region 310 is the lighting region that can be lit among the four lighting regions 310 to 340, the lighting in the fourth lighting region 340 last time (4 ms ago) First, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 27, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[1000] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[1000] is held by the IC5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1-B4 to [HLLL]. Thus, the first lighting area 310 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[10111110]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[10111110] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLHHHHHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HLHHHHHL] to flow the drive current. In this way, in the first lighting area 310, the output rate lighting sections LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit (see FIG. 26A).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the second lighting area 320 the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 . In this case, first, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the previous lighting state (4 ms before) in the first lighting region 310 . Next, as shown in FIG. 29, data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0100] is held by the IC5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1-B4 to [LHLL]. Thus, the second lighting area 320 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0 to 7]=D[11111100]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[11111100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHHHHHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHHHHHLL] to flow the drive current. In this way, in the second lighting area 320, the output rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 are lit (see FIG. 26B).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the third lighting area 330 the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 . In this case, first, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the previous lighting state (4 ms before) in the second lighting region 320 . Next, as shown in FIG. 31, data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0010] is held by the IC5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1-B4 to [LLHL]. Thus, the third lighting area 330 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11011010]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[11011010] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLHHLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHLHHLHL] to flow the drive current. In this way, in the third lighting region 330, the output rate lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are lit (see FIG. 26(C)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 makes the fourth lighting area 340 the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 . In this case, first, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 last time (4 ms ago). Next, as shown in FIG. 33, data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output. Then, the level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[0001] is held by the IC5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLLH]. Thus, the fourth lighting area 340 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[01100000]. Then, the level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level. As a result, the data information D[01100000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LHHLLLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [LHHLLLLL] to flow the driving current. In this way, in the fourth lighting area 340, the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit (see FIG. 26(D)). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 performs lighting control in the first lighting region 310, lighting control in the second lighting region 320, lighting control in the third lighting region 330, and fourth lighting as described above every 4 ms. The lighting control in the area 340 is repeated.

5. Technical significance of drive circuit 200 Next, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the present embodiment will be described. Therefore, a description will be given while comparing with a first comparative example and a second comparative example. As a first comparative example, a drive circuit 200X as shown in FIG. 35 can be considered. This drive circuit 200X is a lighting circuit that selects a lighting region that can be lit from among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300, in addition to the existing circuits of the light emission selection circuit section 210 and the light emission drive circuit section 220 described above. It comprises a selection circuit section 210X and a lighting drive circuit section 220X that enables lighting of the eight output rate lighting sections in the selected lighting region.

The lighting selection circuit section 210X has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit section 210, and includes a flip-flop (IC1X) and a transistor array (ICX2). The lighting drive circuit section 220X has the same configuration as the light emission drive circuit section 220, and includes a flip-flop (IC3X) and a transistor array (IC4X). The connection between the lighting selection circuit section 210X and the lighting drive circuit section 220X and the pay rate display device 300 is exactly the same as the connection between the light emission selection circuit section 210 and the light emission drive circuit section 220 and the game display device 40. . Therefore, in the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example, four ICs (integrated circuits) are newly added to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display 40 to emit light.

By the way, the main control board 80 has many technical restrictions, and each manufacturer designs the main control board 80 so that the maximum performance can be exhibited within the technical restrictions. Therefore, the main control board 80 does not have much space for newly arranging the output indicator 300 and its drive circuit. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a main control board that is larger than the existing main control board 80, but design changes due to the size of the main control board, etc., affect the design of other control boards, resulting in enormous costs. It takes Therefore, it is realistic to bring each component on the existing main control board 80 together to create a space. However, if the parts are too densely packed, it becomes vulnerable to noise. That is, if the components of the main control board are too densely packed, the number of grounds will be reduced, resulting in a design that is vulnerable to noise. From the above point of view, it is desirable that the number of new parts arranged on the main control board 80 is as small as possible.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230) is added. In other words, by connecting the data signal lines Ba to Bh branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah to the output indicator 300, the lighting drive circuit section 220X (see FIG. 35) as in the first comparative example is omitted. there is Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of ICs to be added as compared with the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example shown in FIG. . In addition, it is possible to prevent the design from being susceptible to noise by avoiding the parts on the main control board 80 from being too dense.

As a second comparative example, dynamic lighting control as shown in FIG. 36 may be performed. That is, in the second comparative example, first, as shown in FIG. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36B, light emission control in the second light emitting region 420 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(C), light emission control in the third light emitting region 430 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(D), light emission control in the fourth light emitting region 440 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(E), the lighting control in the first lighting area 310 of the yield indicator 300 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(F), lighting control in the second lighting region 320 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, lighting control in the third lighting region 330 is performed as shown in FIG. 36(G). Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(H), lighting control in the fourth lighting region 340 is performed. After that, the dynamic lighting control shown in FIGS. 36A to 36H is similarly repeated. Therefore, in the second comparative example, focusing on a certain light emitting region or lighting region, light emission control or lighting control is performed at a cycle of 32 ms.

However, in the dynamic lighting control of the second comparative example, the cycle of light emission control (lighting control) is long, and there is a risk that the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300 will flicker. In other words, even though the game display 40 continues to emit light, it appears to be blinking, or even though the output indicator 300 continues to light up, There was a risk that it would appear to be blinking.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of this embodiment, light emission control or lighting control is performed at a cycle of 16 ms in a certain light emitting region or lighting region. That is, the light emission control in the light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40 and the lighting control in the lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 are selectively executed, and the same period ( 16ms) enables dynamic lighting control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300 from flickering. In short, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment is that it is mounted on the main control board 80 while avoiding the dynamic lighting control cycle of the game display 40 or the output rate display 300 from becoming longer than before. It is possible to realize space saving at the time.

6. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "big hit", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". In the case of "loss", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is also called a special game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37, there are roughly two types in this embodiment. There are special jackpots and normal jackpots. The specific jackpot is also called "V long jackpot", and the normal jackpot is also called "V short jackpot". The "V long jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. . A "V-short jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 in a second opening pattern (V-short opening pattern) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. be.

More specifically, the "V long jackpot" that can be won in the special drawing 1 lottery (the first special pattern lottery) is the first big prize opening 30 from 1R to 8R for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. From 9R to 15R, the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R (final round), the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. It's a big hit. In other words, although the total number of rounds for this jackpot is 16R, the actual number of rounds is 9R. The substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which game balls can win up to the maximum number of winning prizes per round (eight in this embodiment). In this V-long jackpot, from 9R to 15R, the opening time of the big prize hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. In addition, in 16R, it is possible to easily pass through the specific area 39 in the second big winning hole 35 . In addition, when the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the "special figure 1_specific symbol" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a.

In addition, the "V long jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery of the 2nd special pattern) opens the 1st big prize mouth 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 15R, The 16R (final round) is a big win in which the second big winning hole 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. In other words, this jackpot has a substantial number of rounds of 16R. Of course, in 16R, passage to the specific area 39 in the second big winning hole 35 is easily possible. When the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the "special figure 2_specific symbol" is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b.

On the other hand, the "V short jackpot" that can be won in the special drawing 1 lottery opens the first big winning mouth 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 8R, and from 9R to 15R This is a big win in which the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 second per 1R, and the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 second per 1R in the 16R (final round). In other words, although the total number of rounds for this jackpot is 16R, the actual number of rounds is 8R.

At 16R in this V-short jackpot, the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is extremely short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 inside the second big winning hole 35 . In addition, in 16R in the V-short jackpot, not only is the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 short, but also the opening timing of the second large winning opening 35 and the operation timing of the distribution member 71 (second state (Fig. 4) (B)) to the first state (timing to be controlled from FIG. 4A)), it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 . When "normal jackpot" is won by lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_normal symbol" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the V long jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game can be shifted to a high probability state by passing the game ball through the specific area 39 during execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V short jackpot is won, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 39 during execution of the jackpot game, so the game state after the jackpot game is the normal probability state described later. (non-high probability state).

However, even when it is controlled to the normal probability state, it is controlled to the time saving state described later. In this case, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. The time-saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 37, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the special figure 1 is 50% for the V long jackpot (specific jackpot) and 50% for the V short jackpot (normal jackpot). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the special figure 2 are all V long jackpots (specific jackpots). Thus, in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is won in the second starting port 21 rather than a jackpot lottery (lottery of special figure 1) in which a game ball wins in the first starting port 20.例文帳に追加The jackpot lottery (lottery of special figure 2) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, a lottery for whether or not a big win is made is performed based on a "random number for a big win", and a lottery for the type of a winning big win is made based on a "random number for a win type". As shown in FIG. 38(A), the jackpot random number ranges from 0 to 65,535. The winning type random number takes a value in the range of 0-9. In addition to the jackpot random number and the winning type random number, the random number obtained based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes a "reach random number" and a "variation pattern random number".

The ready-to-win random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. A reach is a state in which only one of a plurality of performance symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and a jackpot is won depending on which symbol the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is the state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of the shown production patterns. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are slightly swaying within the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-255.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. Random numbers acquired based on passing through the gate 28 include normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 38(B). The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range from 0 to 65535.

7. Explanation of Game State Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. The special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbol display device 42 of the pachinko game machine 1 respectively have a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function. A state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol display 41 is activated is called a "high probability state", and a state in which it is not activated is called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state. That is, the jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table in which the value of the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot is larger than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (see FIG. 39A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol display device 41 is activated, the probability that the display result of the special symbol variation display (that is, the stop symbol) by the special symbol display device 41 is a jackpot symbol is higher than when the special symbol display device 41 is not activated. becomes higher.

Moreover, the state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is called "shortening of working hours", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-shortening of working hours". In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. That is, the variation pattern is determined using the special figure variation pattern table defined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 40). That is, when the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, a shorter variable time is likely to be selected as the variable display of the special symbols compared to when it is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in the time saving state and do not operate in the non time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal design random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is determined using a normal design hit determination table that is larger than the normal design hit determination table used in a non-time saving state, and the hit determination (normal design determination) is performed ( See FIG. 39(C)). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 42 is a normal winning symbol is higher than when it is not activated. .

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is 4 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 39(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22 is operating. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the function of increasing the number of openings of the electric chew 22 is activated.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension function and the number of times of opening increase function of the electric chew 22 are operating, compared to when these functions are not operating As a result, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric sapo control state or an easy ball entry state. On the other hand, the low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state or a non-entering easy state.

A high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are active. That is, operation of one or more of the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the function of increasing the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Therefore, it is sufficient that the electric tube 22 can be opened more easily than when the function is not activated. Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V-long jackpot is a high-probability state, time-saving state, and high base if passage to the specific area 39 is made during the jackpot game. state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this embodiment), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.

In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V short jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e. Low probability state) and time saving state and high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low certainty high base state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is the normal probability state, the non-time saving state, and the low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may also be referred to as "normal game state". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Further, a state in which at least one of the high-probability state and the high-base state is controlled is referred to as a "privilege game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (see FIG. 3) by hitting to the right. This is because it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state due to the electric sapo control, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. . Therefore, the game ball is passed through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is struck to the right to enter the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (see FIG. 3) by striking to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. It is because Therefore, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first starting port 20.例文帳に追加This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

8. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. Main counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 42 from the ROM 83 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process, which will be described later, is performed (S001).

Then, following the power-on process (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal design/special design main random number update process is executed (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 38 are updated by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generating circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the CPU 82 with a period of 4 msec. And, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various counters by normal design / special design main random number update processing (S003) Value update processing is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

Before explaining the power-on process (S001), the point of checking whether the contents stored in the special memory 89 are correct or not, which is one of the features of this embodiment, will be explained. In this embodiment, when power is cut off due to business closing or power failure, etc., the checksum is calculated and stored in the RAM 84 (hereinafter referred to as "game RAM 84"), and the checksum in the special memory 89 is calculated and stored. It is designed to be kept. A checksum is one of error detection codes calculated to check the reliability of each data (command, etc.) stored. In this embodiment, each data stored in the game RAM 84 or the special memory 89 is regarded as a hexadecimal number, and the sum of these numbers is used as the checksum. However, the checksum may be a value calculated by another method.

In this embodiment, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated when the power is turned on again after the power failure. Then, it is verified whether or not the checksum value of the special memory 89 calculated at this time matches the checksum value stored at the time of power failure. As a result, if the checksum values match, the memory contents of the special memory 89 (100 ball counter value, actual total prize ball counter value, prize ball counter value, consecutive prize balls) The value of the number of balls counter, the value of the variation number counter, etc.) are judged to be normal. As a result, it is possible to display the payout rate with the correct storage contents of the special memory 89 . On the other hand, if the checksum values do not match, it is determined that the contents stored in the special memory 89 are abnormal. By doing this, it is possible to avoid displaying the odds with incorrect stored contents by erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 .

[Power ON Processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the power ON processing (S001), access permission setting to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is first performed (S011). As a result, information can be written to and read from the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (whether it is ON or not) (S012). That is, it is determined whether or not a signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 has been received from the power supply board 150 . If the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (YES in S012), the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the operation has not been performed (NO in S012), then it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power-off flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in power-off monitoring processing (see FIG. 56), which will be described later.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S013), there is a possibility that the power has not been cut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the power interruption flag is ON (YES in S013), the checksum of the game RAM 84 is calculated (S014), and the checksum of the game RAM 84 stored (memorized) at the time of the power interruption ( (see step S2903 in FIG. 56)) (S015). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 84 are abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 84 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S016.

In step S016, setting management of the work area of the game RAM 84 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the ROM 83 and set in the work area of the game RAM 84 . After that, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the power-off flag (S017), and proceeds to step S021.

On the other hand, in step S018, all information stored in the game RAM 84 is cleared (S018). However, at this time, the contents stored in the special memory 89 (100-ball counter value, actual total prize ball counter value, prize ball counter value, continuous prize ball counter value, fluctuation counter value) Value, character ratio, and continuous character ratio (see FIG. 11(C))) are not cleared. As described above, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the output rate can be calculated as a converged value by not clearing the contents stored in the special memory 89 . After that, the game control microcomputer 81 initializes the working area of the game RAM 84 (S019). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the ROM 83 is set in the work area of the game RAM 84 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets in the output buffer a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the clearing of the contents stored in the game RAM 84 (S020), and proceeds to step S021.

In step S021, the game control microcomputer 81 calculates the checksum of the special memory 89, and stores (stores) it at the time of power failure in the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 56). (see step S2905) (S022). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S022), it is determined that the contents stored in the special memory 89 are abnormal, and all information stored in the special memory 89 is cleared (S023). That is, the value of each counter shown in FIG. 11C is reset to "0" and the information stored in each storage area is erased. In this way, as described above, it is possible to avoid displaying the odds with the wrong memory contents of the special memory 89 . Then, a special memory clear command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of clearing the contents of the special memory 89 is set in the output buffer (S024), and the process proceeds to step S025. On the other hand, if the checksum values match at step S022, it is determined that the contents stored in the special memory 89 are normal, the processing at steps S023 and S024 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S025.

In step S025, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other initial settings such as the settings of the CPU 82, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc., and finishes this process.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the main-side timer interrupt process (S005), first, an input process, which will be described later, is executed (S101). Then, like the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 42, the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process is executed (S102). Next, a starting port sensor detection process, which will be described later, is executed (S103), and a normal operation process is executed (S104).

In the normal operation process (S104), mainly, the normal design random number obtained in the starting sensor process (S103) is determined, and the normal design display (fluctuation display and stop display) indicating the determination result is performed. to run. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the variable display of the normal symbols at the timing of starting the variable display of the normal symbols, and stores the data information in the game RAM 84. It is set in the third game data storage area (see FIG. 11(B)). The third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting area 430 (see FIG. 12) including the normal symbol display 42 to emit light. is. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81, at the timing of starting the stop display of the normal symbols, data information (light emitting data ) and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 .

After the normal operation process (S104), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special operation process (S105), which will be described later. Next, specific area sensor detection processing is executed (S106). In the specific area sensor detection process (S106), it is determined whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a. In addition, as the V flag is turned ON, a V passage command for causing the sub-control board 90 to notify the V passage is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84 .

After the specific area sensor detection process (S106), the game control microcomputer 81 executes an output process (S107), which will be described later, and a power-off monitoring process (S108), which will be described later. After that, other processing (S109) is executed, and the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends. Then, the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 (see FIG. 42). A side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the input processing (S101), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first large The detection signals detected by the winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 9) are read (S110). Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is a winning detection signal relating to the payout of prize balls (S111). If it is not a winning detection signal (NO in S111), other processing (S122) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S118. For example, if the signal is a fraud detection signal detected by a magnetic sensor, impact sensor, or the like, processing for reporting fraud is executed as other processing (S122).

On the other hand, if it is a winning detection signal (YES in S111), the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to (S112). As shown in FIG. 11(A), the prize ball counter addition table indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole, and also includes a counter for 100 balls, a prize ball counter, and a continuous prize ball number. It is a table showing to which of the counters the number of winning balls is counted up (added). After referring to the prize ball number counter addition table (S112), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning hole is set in the output buffer of the game RAM84. This prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 110 by an output process (S107), which will be described later.

After step S113, the game control microcomputer 81 executes prize ball counter addition processing, which will be described later, based on the prize ball counter addition table referred to (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the game machine frame 50 is open (the inner frame 52 is relative to the outer frame 51), that is, whether or not there is detection by the frame open detection switch 50a (S115). If there is detection (YES in S115), then it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S116). The customer waiting flag is a flag indicating a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S116), the output rate calculation process described later is executed (S117), and the process proceeds to step S118. On the other hand, if there is no detection by the frame open detection switch 50a (NO at S115) or if the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S116), the process proceeds to step S118 without executing the output rate calculation process (S117).

That is, in this embodiment, the output rate calculation process (S117, specific calculation process) is performed only when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the player is waiting for a customer is satisfied. This is based on the following reasons. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 of the pachinko game machine 1 has a limited processing capacity. During execution of the variable display of the special symbols and during control to the jackpot game state (game control state), the control process is being executed with a larger load on the game control microcomputer 81 than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 81 is temporarily in addition to the control processing (specific control processing) related to the variable display of the special symbol or the control processing (specific control processing) during the control of the jackpot game state, the division of the load is large If the processing up to output rate calculation processing (S117) is executed, it may become an excessive processing load. From the above, in the game control state where the load of control processing is heavy, the output rate calculation process (S117) is not performed, and in the customer waiting state where the load of control processing is light, the output rate calculation process (S117) is performed. It is possible to distribute the load of control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 . As will be described later, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed or not in a customer waiting state (when the display conditions are not satisfied), the output rate indicator 300 displays the output rate (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio). do not display Therefore, when the output rate is not displayed, the output rate calculation process (S117) is not executed, thereby avoiding unnecessary control processing.

At step S118, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. If no operation has been performed (NO in S118), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it has been operated (YES in S118), it is determined whether or not the current display flag is "1" (S119). The display flag indicates a value of either "1" or "2". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S119), the display flag is switched to "2" (S120), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S119), the display flag is switched to "1" (S121), and this processing ends. That is, each time the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, the display flag is switched to "1" or "2".

Here, the relationship between the display flag and the operation of RAM clear switch 152 will be described. As will be described later, when the output rate is displayed, if the display flag is "1", the role ratio is displayed, and if the display flag is "2", the continuous role ratio is displayed. there is Therefore, every time the person who checks the output rate operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the character ratio and the display of the continuous character ratio. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 152 was only operated when power was turned on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the existing RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used as an operation means for switching between the display of the character product ratio and the display of the continuous character product ratio without providing a new switch.

[Prize Ball Counter Addition Processing] As shown in FIG. 46, in the prize ball counter addition processing (S114), first, the type of winning detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 45 and the prize shown in FIG. Based on the number-of-balls counter addition table, the value of the 100-ball counter is added (S201). For example, in the case of winning the normal winning opening 27, the value of the 100-ball counter is increased by "8", and in the case of winning the first big winning opening 30, the value of the 100-ball counter is increased to "15". ” is added. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the 100-ball counter is greater than or equal to "100" (S202). If it is less than "100" (NO in S202), proceed to step S205. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S202), "1" is added to the value of the counter for the number of actual winning balls, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the counter for 100 balls, and the process proceeds to step S205. move on. In this way, the total number of prize balls won by the player can be counted as 1 in units of 100 balls.

In step S205, it is determined whether or not the player has won a prize in the big winning slot (first big winning slot 30 or second big winning slot 35). If it is a prize in the big winning slot (YES in S205), the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by "15" (S206), and the value of the consecutive prize ball number counter is incremented by "15". (S207), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the winning is not the big winning opening (NO in S205), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the electric chew 22 (second starting opening 21) (S208). If it is a prize to the electric chew 22 (YES in S208), the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by "7" (S209), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the prize is not awarded to the electric chew 22 (S208), the prize is awarded to the normal winning port 27 or the first starting port 20, so the prize ball number counter or the continuous prize ball number counter is set. This process ends without adding.

[Delivery Rate Calculation Processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the delivery rate calculation processing (S117), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total winning ball counter is equal to or greater than "1" (S301). If it is "1" or more (YES in S301), the role product ratio calculation process is executed (S302). Specifically, the value of the prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the role product ratio as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated accessory ratio, the value to the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the role product ratio is stored in the role product ratio storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory 89 (S303).

Subsequently, continuous role product ratio calculation processing is executed (S304). Specifically, the value of the consecutive award ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous role product ratio as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of 100 times. In the calculated continuous accessory ratio, the value to the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the continuous role product ratio is stored in the continuous role product ratio storage area (see FIG. 11(C)) of the special memory (S305), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S301, if the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is not "1" or more, it means "0", and this processing is finished. In other words, when the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is "0", division cannot be performed by the value of the denominator which is "0" in the processing of step S302 or S304, so this processing ends immediately.

[Starting opening sensor detection process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S103), first, whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a is detected. (S401). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S401), gate passage processing (S402) is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S401), the process passes through the gate passing process (S402) and proceeds to step S403. In the gate passing process (S402), if the gate sensor 28a is ON, the normal symbol random number (see FIG. 38(B)) is obtained on condition that the number of normal symbol random numbers already stored is less than 4. , is stored in the general map holding storage unit 86. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of normal figure suspension, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 .

In step S403, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a (S403). If the game ball has not won the second start port 21 (NO in S403), the process proceeds to step S407, but if the game ball has won the second start port 21 (YES in S403), special figure 2 Whether the number of pending balls (the number of second special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special pending provided in the game RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number) (S404). Then, if the number of special 2 pending balls has reached "4" (YES in S404), the process proceeds to step S407, but if the number of special 2 pending balls is less than "4" (in S404 NO), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 (S405). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure reservation, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. .

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S406) it does. In the special figure 2 random number acquisition process (S406), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and fluctuation Acquire the pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, acquire the random value group shown in FIG. 38 (A)), and store the acquired random values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the current special figure 2 Stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b corresponding to the number of reservation balls.

Subsequently, in the starting hole sensor detection process (S103), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S407). . When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (NO at S407), the process is finished, but when the game ball has won the first start port 20 (YES at S407), the special figure 1 is reserved. Whether the number of balls (the number of the first special figure reservation, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservation provided in the game RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number) Judge (S408). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls has reached "4" (YES in S408), the process ends, but if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is less than "4" (NO in S408) ), and add "1" to the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls (S409). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure reservation, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. .

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S410) is done. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S410), like the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS) , Obtain the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random value group shown in FIG. 38 (A)), and obtain the obtained random value It is stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls among the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 49, in the special action processing (S105), the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and the "special action status" is "2". In case (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) is performed, and if "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S1301, S1303, YES in S1305) , Special symbol determination processing (S1306) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4" (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 50, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special 1 reserved balls) of the first start port 20 is "0" ( S1407). Then, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1416). If it is ON (YES at S1416), this process is finished, and if it is not ON (NO at S1416), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1417) and this process is finished.

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1401), special figure 2 big hit determination processing is executed (S1402). In the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38(A)) is read to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403), the variation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected by the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the variation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure reservation is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 . Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b Clear the storage area corresponding to (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set to the output buffer of the game RAM84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing a variable display of the second special symbol, and stores the data information in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (see FIG. 11 (B)). )). The second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

Also, when the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special figures 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing is executed (S1408). In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38(A)) is read to determine whether or not the jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409), the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected based on the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the variation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure reservation is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 . Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the first reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a Clear the storage area corresponding to (S1411). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set to the output buffer of the game RAM84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and stores the data information in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11 (B). )). The first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

At step S1413, the value of the variation number counter in the special memory 89 is incremented by "1". In this way, the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuation display of special symbols) after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time is counted. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1414), and if it is ON (YES in S1414), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1415), and this processing is finished.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (S1304) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation stop command is set in the output buffer, and the special action status is set to "3". At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special figure 1 at the timing of stopping and displaying the first special symbol. Then, the data information is set in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 . On the other hand, if it is the timing to stop and display the second special symbol, data information (light emission data) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 is created, and the data information is displayed. It is set in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 .

In the special design determination process (S1306) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the stopped special design is a jackpot design. Set to "4". At this time, the jackpot opening command is set in the output buffer. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the special operation status is set to "1" in order to execute the special symbol waiting process (S1302) again. In addition, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), in order to manage the control period of the high probability state, if the probability variation flag is ON, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1, and if it becomes "0", the probability variation flag is set. Turn off. In addition, in order to manage the control period of the time saving state (that is, the high base state), if the time saving flag is ON, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1, and if it becomes "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF. Also, when the special operation status is set to "4", if the variable probability flag or the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the jackpot game, it is controlled to the low probability low base state.

In this special symbol determination process (S1306), the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the game state when changing the game state, and uses the data information as the game data. It is set in the fourth game data storage area (see FIG. 11(B)) of the RAM 84 for use. The fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 12) including the game state display 46 to emit light. is. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying that a right-handed state should be hit when starting a jackpot game, and stores the data information in the RAM 84 for game play. 4 Set in the game data storage area. Furthermore, data information (light emission data) for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 .

[Special Electric Accessory Process (Big Win Game)] As shown in FIG. 51, in the special electric accessary process (S1307), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2201). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all of the jackpots (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) have been opened in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is open (S2202). If it is not open (NO in S2202), whether it has reached the time to open the big winning mouth, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and the opening start time in the first round game has arrived, or It is determined whether or not the interval time (closing time) until the once closed big winning hole is opened again has passed and the opening start time has arrived (S2203).

If the determination result in step S2203 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S2203 is YES, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a jackpot game as a V long jackpot (S2204). If it is not a V long jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2207, but if it is a V long jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the 16th round in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (S2205). If it is not the time to start the 16th round (NO in S2205), the process proceeds to step S2207. On the other hand, if it is time to start the 16th round (YES in S2205), V effective period setting processing (S2206) is performed.

In the V effective period setting process (S2206), the detection of game balls by the specific area sensor 39a is valid for a few seconds while the second big winning hole 35 is open and after the closing of the second big winning hole 35 in the 16th round. Set the V effective period to be judged. In this embodiment, other periods (including when the jackpot game is not executed) are set as the V invalid period during which detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid.

In step S2207, the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 37) corresponding to the kind of big win. In addition, the distribution member 71 always moves in a constant motion from the start of the round game (or jackpot game).

In subsequent step S2208, a round designation command transmission determination process is performed. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2208), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening in step S2207 is the first opening in one round game. A round designation command including information on the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84 .

In step S2202 of the special electric accessary product processing (S1307), if the large winning opening is open (YES in S2202), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (S2209). In this form, the closing condition is that the number of prizes won into the big prize hole in the round game reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (8 per 1R in this form), or that the time to close the big prize hole is reached. Either of the above conditions (that is, a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 37) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning slot is not met (NO in S2209), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (YES in S2209), the big winning opening is closed (blocked) (S2210). Then, when one round game ends due to the closing of step S2210 (YES in S2211), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2212), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0". (S2213). If it is not "0" (NO in S2013), the process ends as it is to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2213), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2214), and a jackpot ending is started (S2215). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2216), and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2201 (YES in S2201), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending time has passed (S2217), and the ending time has passed. If not (NO in S2217), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2217), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2218), the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2219), and the special action status is set to "1" (S2220). After that, the game state setting process (S2221) is performed, and this process ends.

In the game state setting process (S2221), it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON, and if the V flag is not ON, the time saving flag is turned ON and "100" is set to the time saving counter. As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game is controlled to a low-probability-high base state in which the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag and the short time flag are turned ON, and "160" is set to the variable probability counter and the short time counter. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability high base state in which the so-called ST number is set to 160 times.

In this game state setting process (S2221), in order to change the game state, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the game state after the change, and stores the data information. It is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 . Also, in order to end the jackpot game, data information for erasing the display of the number of rounds is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 .

[Output process] After the special action process (S105) and the specific area sensor detection process (S106), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (S107) (see Fig. 44). In the output process (S107), as shown in FIG. 52, first, whether or not the gaming machine frame 50 is open (the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51), that is, whether there is detection by the frame open detection switch 50a. It is determined whether or not (S2301). If the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), that is, if there is no detection by the frame open detection switch 50a, the game display process described later is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The game display process (S2303) is a process for causing the game display 40 to display game information (jackpot symbols, game status, etc.) relating to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, that is, whether or not the customer is waiting (S2302). If the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), the game display process is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the later-described output rate display process (specific display process) is executed (S2304), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The output rate display process (S2304) is a process for displaying the output rate on the output rate indicator 300. FIG. In step S2305, as other output setting processing, the commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc., and the main control board 80 is output. finish.

Thus, in this embodiment, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed, or if the variable display of special symbols or the jackpot game is being executed, the game display process (S2303) is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame is open and the special symbol fluctuation display and the jackpot game are not being executed, the output rate display process (S2304) is executed. In other words, the display condition for displaying the payout ratio on the payout ratio indicator 300 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “display condition”) is limited to the game machine frame 50 being open and waiting for customers. ing. The reason why the display conditions are limited in this way is as follows.

First, as described above, the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 so that the person who checks the payout rate can confirm the payout rate as reliable information. Therefore, unless the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, the pay rate indicator 300 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable to set the display condition to open the gaming machine frame 50 so that the output indicator can be visually recognized. That is, according to the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of this embodiment, the display and output on the game display 40 are designed to avoid an increase in IC as much as possible and to prevent blinking during dynamic lighting control. The display on the rate indicator 300 becomes alternative. Therefore, when the game machine frame 50 is open, it is considered that the player is basically not playing a game, which is preferable in that it is not necessary to display the game information on the game display 40 .

However, immediately after the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, if the variable display of the special symbols is still being executed, or if the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the variable display of the special symbols is started. could be. In this case, game information must be displayed on the game display device 40 . That is, it is necessary not to display the output rate on the output rate indicator 300 . In this way, the display condition is restricted to the customer waiting state in addition to the game machine frame 50 being opened. It should be noted that the output rate is not to be shown to the player, but is to be shown to the person who inspects whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illegally modified. It is enough if it is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to display the odds of winning during the game, and there is no problem even if the display conditions are restricted as described above.

[Game Display Processing] In the game display processing (S2303), as shown in FIG. 53, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1". The common flag is set to a value of either "1", "2", "3" or "4". It indicates whether to perform light emission control.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2401), data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2402). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched (set) to "H" level (S2403) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the previous (4 ms ago) light emission state of the fourth light emission region 440 is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[1000] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2404). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2405) (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410 . Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2406). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2407) (see FIG. 19). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light-emitting portions LA1 to LA8 to emit light in the light-emitting mode (for example, the jackpot pattern) to be displayed in the first light-emitting area 410. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2408), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2401, the process advances to step S2409 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2409), first, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2410). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2411) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state of the first light emitting region 410 at the previous time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0100] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2412). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2413) (see FIG. 20). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light-emitting region 420 . Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2414). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2415) (see FIG. 21). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light-emitting portions LA9 to LA16 to emit light in a light-emitting mode (for example, a lost pattern) to be displayed in the second light-emitting area 420. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2416), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2409, the process advances to step S2417 to determine whether or not the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2417), first, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2418). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2419) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emission state of the second light emission region 420 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0010] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2420). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2421) (see FIG. 22). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light-emitting region 430 . Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2422). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2423) (see FIG. 23). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light-emitting sections LA17 to LA24 to emit light in the light-emitting mode to be displayed in the third light-emitting area 430. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2424), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2417, it means that the common flag is set to "4", and the process proceeds to step S2425. In step S2425, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2426) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emission state of the third light emission region 430 at the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0001] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2427). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2428) (see FIG. 24). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light-emitting region 440 . Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2429). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2430) (see FIG. 25). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light-emitting sections LA25 to LA32 to emit light in the light-emitting mode to be displayed in the fourth light-emitting region 440. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2431), and this processing ends.

[Performance Display Processing] In the performance display processing (S2304), as shown in FIG. 54, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1" (S2501). The common flag, which was also used in the game display process (S2303) described above, indicates in which one of the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300 lighting control is to be performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2501), data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2502). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2503) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state of the fourth lighting region 340 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[1000] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2504). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2505) (see FIG. 27). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the first lighting region 310 . Next, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2506). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 45). 2" indicates the display of the continuous accessory ratio. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2506), data for displaying the tens digit of the character product ratio stored in the character product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is sent from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Information D[0...7] is output (S2507). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2506), the tens place of the continuous role product ratio stored in the continuous role product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0 . . . 7] for doing is output (S2508). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2509) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to light the yield rate lighting sections LB1 to LB8 in the lighting mode (for example, "6") to be displayed in the first lighting region 310. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2510), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2501, the process advances to step S2511 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2511), first, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2512). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2513) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 in the previous time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0100] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2514). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2515) (see FIG. 29). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the second lighting region 320 . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2516). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2516), data for displaying the first place of the character product ratio stored in the character product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is sent from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Information D[0...7] is output (S2517). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2516), the ones digit of the continuous role product ratio stored in the continuous role product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0 . . . 7] for doing is output (S2518). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2519) (see FIG. 30). As a result, it is possible to light the yield rate lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the lighting mode (for example, “0”) to be displayed in the second lighting region 320 . Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2520), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" at step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2521 as shown in FIG. 55 to determine whether or not the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2521), data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2522). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2523) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0010] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2524). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2525) (see FIG. 31). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the third lighting region 330 . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2526).

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2527). That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[01100000]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529), the yield lighting units LB18 and LB19 of the third lighting area 330 are lit and "1" is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who checks the output rate will see the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Let them understand that the number (delivery rate) of is the role ratio.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), the data information D[0...7] for displaying "2" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2528). That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[11011010]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529) (see FIG. 32), the output rate lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 of the third lighting area 330 are lit, "2" is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who checks the output rate will see the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Let them understand that the number (delivery rate) of is the continuous accessory ratio. In step S2530, the common flag is switched to "4", and this process ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2521, it means that the common flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2531. In step S2531, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2532) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0001] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2533). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2534) (see FIG. 33). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the fourth lighting region 340 .

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total award ball counter in the special memory 89 is "100" or more (S2535). In other words, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on for the first time reaches "10000". If it is "100" or more (YES in S2535), the process proceeds to step S2536. On the other hand, if it is not "100" or more (NO in S2535), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2537). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time reaches "3000". If "3000" or more (YES in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2536. In step S2536, data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=D[01100000]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539) (see FIG. 34), the yield lighting units LB26 and LB27 of the fourth lighting area 340 are lit and "1" is displayed. be. In this manner, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the person who checks the payout rate converges to some extent on the payout rate (character ratio or continuous character ratio) being displayed. to understand that it is a valid value.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize number counter is less than "100" (NO at S2535) and the value of the variation number counter is less than "3000" (NO at S2537), the process proceeds to step S2538. . In step S2538, data information D[0...7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[11111100]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2539), the output rate lighting units LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 of the fourth lighting area 340 are lit, and "0" is displayed. is displayed. In this manner, in this embodiment, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the person who confirms the payout rate will still be able to converge the payout rate (character ratio or continuous role ratio) being displayed. Let them understand that it is a reference value that may not be correct. At step S2540, the common flag is switched to "1", and this processing ends.

[Power-off monitoring process] After the above-described output process (S107), the game control microcomputer 81 executes power-off monitoring process (S108) (see Fig. 44). In the power-off monitoring process (S108), as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2901), and if there is no input (NO in S2901), the process ends. The power-off signal is a signal input by the game control microcomputer 81 when the voltage of the monitored power source begins to drop due to power failure. Specifically, the power supply board 150 monitors the generated 32V voltage, and when the voltage becomes 17V (predetermined voltage value) or less, it outputs a power off signal to the game control microcomputer 81, and from that point on, a predetermined A reset signal is output after the elapse of time. The voltage to be monitored and the voltage value (predetermined voltage value) at which the power-off signal is output can be changed as appropriate.

If there is a power-off signal input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), the checksum of the game RAM 84 is calculated (S2902), and the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2903). . Next, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated (S2904), and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory 89 (S2905). Subsequently, the power-off flag is turned ON (S2906), and prohibition of access to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is set (S2907). This makes it impossible to write or read information to or from the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 . Thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to the main side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 44).

9. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 [Sub Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, a counter, a timer, a flag, a status, a buffer, etc. appearing in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94 . The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 57 from the ROM 93 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power-off flag (flag that is turned on when the power is off) is ON and the contents of the RAM 94 are normal (S4001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power cutoff flag is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM 94 are abnormal even if the sub-side power cutoff flag is ON, the RAM 94 is initialized. (S4002) and proceed to step S4003.

On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4001), that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is turned ON due to the power failure, but the contents of the RAM 94 are maintained normally, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether or not a notification command has been received (S4011). If the RAM clear notification command is received (YES in S4011), the memory contents of the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are cleared. Therefore, the contents stored in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO at S4011), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the contents stored in the RAM 94. FIG.

In step S4003, other initial settings are made. In the other initial settings, for example, settings of the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed. Also, if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include the random numbers for determining the effect pattern for determining the effect pattern, the random numbers for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and the random numbers for determining the effect for determining the various effect effects. etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In command transmission processing (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. FIG. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 100 uses the image display device 7 according to the command to execute various effects (variation effects, opening effects, round effects, ending effects, etc.). The sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 as various effects are executed by the image control board 100 . Also, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light through the sub-driving board 107 and the relay board 108, and the board movable body 15 is driven. The effect control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed.

[Receiving Interrupt Processing] In the receiving interrupt processing (S4008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. This is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010). As shown in FIG. 41, in the reception interrupt process (S4008), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 94 (S4101).

[1 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 1 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing (S4201) is performed. In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the effect button detection switch 63a (see FIG. 10) and the select button detection switch 64a (see FIG. 10).

Subsequently, lamp data output processing (S4202) is performed. In the lamp data output process (S4202), the lamp data created in other processes (S4304) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is sent to the sub-drive board 107 in order to cause the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 to emit light at a timing that matches the performance. Output. That is, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lamp data.

Next, drive control processing (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), drive data (data for driving the movable board drive motor 15a) is created and output in order to drive the movable board 15 at a timing suitable for the performance. That is, according to the driving data, the movable board 15 is driven in a predetermined operation mode.

Then, watchdog timer processing (S4204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this processing ends.

[10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) is executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process, which will be described later, is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM 94 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition processing (S4302) is performed (S4303).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66), and creates voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 67) and voice Other processes such as outputting to the control board 106 and updating random numbers for determining various effects are executed (S4304), and this process ends.

[Received command analysis process] As shown in FIG. 61, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), If it is received, the fluctuation effect start processing is performed (S4402). In the fluctuation production start process (S4402), the fluctuation start command is analyzed, and a fluctuation production pattern is selected based on the analysis result. In addition, the effect pattern as the stop pattern and the notice effect are also selected. Then, a variable performance start command for starting the variable performance with the selected performance contents is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if received, performs fluctuation production end processing (S4404). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4404), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4406). In the opening effect selection process (S4406), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance with the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if received, performs a round effect selection process (S4408). In the round effect selection process (S4408), the round designation command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect in the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4410). In the ending effect selection process (S4410), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a special memory clear command is received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if received, performs a special memory clear notification process (S4412). In the special memory clear notification process (S4412), a special memory clear notification command for notifying that the memory contents of the special memory 89 have been erased is set in the output buffer of the RAM94. As a result, when the special memory clear notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes the display screen 7a to display " A clear image CL1 showing the characters "Special memory cleared" is displayed. Also, at this time, a special voice is output from the speaker 67 suggesting that the memory contents of the special memory 89 have been erased. In this way, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the contents stored in the special memory 89 have been erased, that is, that the output rate has been initialized. Note that the mode of notifying that the contents stored in the special memory 89 have been erased can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the display screen 7a displays a clear image CL2 indicating the characters "The output rate has been initialized", or a predetermined lamp (the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5) is displayed. It may be made to emit light in a special light emission mode.

In step S4413, as other processing, processing based on received commands other than the above commands (for example, processing for notifying V passage based on V passage command indicating passage to specific region 39, etc.) is performed. Then, the received command analysis processing (S4301) ends.

10. Effects of the present embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (first embodiment), the control processing of the main control board 80 causes the output indicator 300 to display the It is possible to display the output rate. In other words, the pay rate is displayed by the main control board 80 that performs the main game control, and the pay rate is not displayed by the sub control board 90, for example. Therefore, it is possible for a person who confirms (inspects) the yield rate to grasp the yield rate as reliable information. As a result, it is possible to correctly determine whether the pachinko game machine 1 has been illegally modified or whether the output rate is abnormal due to a defect or failure.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display on the game display device 40 and the display on the output rate display device 300 are alternatively performed. This makes it possible to prevent the display control by the game control microcomputer 81 from becoming complicated. The display condition for displaying the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the player is waiting for a customer. Therefore, when the game machine frame 50 is open, even if a game ball enters the starting holes 20 and 21 and the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the display condition is not established. Therefore, in the above case, the game information (special symbols, etc.) relating to the progress of the game is displayed on the game display 40, and the function of displaying the game information is prevented from being lost even though the game is in progress. Is possible.

11. Modifications Modifications will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the first form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the first mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 73. FIG. In the above-described first form, the output rate is configured to be displayed on the output rate indicator 300 . On the other hand, in the modified example of the first form, it is configured so that the base can be displayed on the base display. The base (specific percentage value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls won by the player to the number of game balls shot by the player (total number of shot balls, specific number of game balls). be. The base display for displaying the base is composed of 4 consecutive 7 segments, and has exactly the same hardware configuration as the above-described output rate display 300 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "base display (specific display) 300". The number of shot balls is a denominator value (denominator measured value) before calculating the base, and the total number of prize balls is a numerator value (numerator measured value) before calculating the base.

In order to calculate the base, it is necessary to count the number of shot balls. Here, in this embodiment, all entrances provided in the game area 3 (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27 , counting the number of game balls entering the out port 16). The number of game balls thus counted is regarded as the number of shot balls. However, in the first form described above, a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the out port 16 is not provided.

Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63, an out-port sensor 16a is arranged on the out-port discharge path HK extending from the out-port 16 to the outside of the game area 3. FIG. The out hole sensor 16 a detects a game ball entering the out hole 16 . In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, or the normal winning hole 27 does not pass through the out hole sensor 16a. It is designed to be discharged outside the game area 3 . In other words, the out-hole sensor 16a of this modified example detects a game ball that has not won any of the winning holes. As shown in FIG. 64, the main control board 80 is connected to the outlet sensor 16a via a relay board 88. As shown in FIG. Therefore, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a is input to the game control microcomputer 81. FIG.

Here, in order to count the number of shot balls, a method of providing a sensor for detecting game balls shot toward the game area 3 near the rail member 4 (see FIG. 1) can be considered. However, in this method, after the sensor has detected a game ball that has been shot, there is a possibility that the game ball that returns due to its weak momentum will be detected again, and there is a possibility that the number of shot balls cannot be accurately counted. Therefore, in this modification, by counting all game balls discharged outside the game area 3, the number of shot balls can be counted as accurately as possible.

By the way, before the pachinko game machine is installed in the hall, a trial shooting test of the base (ball output rate) is conducted. In the one hour sighting test, the base is checked to be no more than 3 (300%). The 10 hour sighting test also checks that the base is above 0.5 (50%) and not above 2 (200%). However, in the past, it was not possible to completely deny the possibility that the base was illegally modified after being inspected, or that the base was out of the normal range due to a failure or malfunction. Therefore, in this modified example, the base can be displayed on the base display 300 .

In this variant, there are three types of bases. The base in the normal game state (non-time-saving state), the base in the time-saving state (high probability state and time-saving state, or low probability state and time-saving state), and the jackpot game state (from the start to the end of the jackpot game) is the basis of The base in the normal game state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the normal game state. The base in the time saving state is the ratio of the total number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired counted only in the time saving state. The base in the jackpot gaming state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the jackpot gaming state. By confirming each base segmented for each game state in this way, it is possible to more accurately judge an abnormality of the pachinko game machine 1 as compared with the case where only the base for all game states can be confirmed.

Next, display on the base display 300 will be described. In the first lighting area 310, the base in the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal base") or the base in the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving base") is displayed in percent (percentage) display the digits. However, the normal base and time-saving base almost never exceed 1 (100%), but the base in the jackpot game state (hereinafter referred to as “jackpot base (ball output rate)”) almost exceeds 1 Become. Therefore, in the first lighting area 310, the hundreds place is displayed when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage.

In the second lighting area 320, the one's digit is displayed when the normal base or the short time base is displayed in percentage, while the tens digit is displayed when the jackpot base is displayed in percentage. In this modified example, the base indicator 300 does not display the ones digit when the jackpot base is displayed in percent. This is because it is almost meaningless to check the third significant digit of the jackpot base.

The third lighting area 330 indicates whether the base displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is a normal base, a time-saving base, or a jackpot base. In this modification, when the normal bass is displayed, the third lighting area 330 displays "1". Moreover, when the time-saving base is displayed, "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. - 特許庁Also, when the jackpot base is displayed, "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. - 特許庁

The fourth lighting area 340 indicates whether the base displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is an effective value or a reference value. The meaning of the valid value or the reference value is to indicate whether or not the base has converged to some extent, as in the first form. In this modification, the total number of shot balls (the total number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state) from the time the power is turned on to the present time is "100000". ", or the second condition that the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed from the time the power is turned on to the present time is "3000" (predetermined number of rotations) or more. If the above condition is satisfied, it is regarded as a value (effective value) in which the base converges to some extent. Conversely, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it is regarded as a value (reference value) in which the base has not converged to some extent.

As shown in FIG. 65(C), the special memory 89 of the modified example is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the base. Specifically, the special memory 89 has a counter for normal 100 balls, a counter for the number of normal balls fired, a counter for the number of normal total prize balls, a normal base storage area, a counter for 100 short-time balls, a counter for the number of short-time fired balls, and a total number of short-time prize balls. A counter, a time-saving base storage area, a counter for 100 jackpot balls, a counter for the number of shot balls for a jackpot, a counter for the total number of jackpot balls, a jackpot base storage area, a counter for the number of fluctuations, and a checksum storage area are provided. The special memory 89 of the modified example is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot hold the stored contents when the power supply is stopped, like the special memory 89 of the first form. However, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on, as in the first mode.

The normal 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of balls fired by the player in the normal game state one by one, and is reset to "0" when 100 balls are counted. It's becoming The normal shot ball number counter (second counter) counts by one when 100 balls are counted by the normal 100 ball counter. These normal 100 ball counter and normal shot ball number counter measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in 100 ball units (measurement means for 100 balls). is. By calculating the normal base using the counter for normal 100 balls and the counter for the number of normal shot balls, it is possible to simplify software processing for division as described in the first mode. Together with this, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The normal total number of prize balls counter counts the total number of prize balls in the normal game state from when the power is turned on to the present time. The normal base storage area stores the calculated normal base.

The time-saving 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state one by one, and is reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted. ing. The time-saving ball number counter (second counter) counts by one when 100 balls are counted by the time-saving 100-ball counter. These time-saving 100 ball counters and time-saving ball counters measure the number of balls fired in the time-saving state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in 100 ball units (measurement means for 100 balls). be. By calculating the time-saving base using the time-saving 100 ball counter and the time-saving ball number counter, it is possible to simplify the software processing during division as described in the first form. Together with this, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The time-saving total prize ball number counter counts the total number of prize balls in the time-saving state from when the power is turned on to the present time. The short working hours base storage area stores the calculated short working hours base.

The jackpot 100 ball counter (first counter) counts the number of shot balls shot by the player in the jackpot game state one by one, and is reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted. It's becoming The jackpot shot ball number counter (second counter) counts by one when 100 balls are counted by the jackpot 100-ball counter. The 100 jackpot ball counter and the jackpot shot ball count counter measure the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in 100 balls (measurement means for 100 balls). is. By calculating the jackpot base using the counter for 100 jackpot balls and the counter for the number of shot balls for jackpot hits, it is possible to simplify software processing during division as described in the first embodiment. Together with this, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The jackpot total number of prize balls counter counts the total number of prize balls in the jackpot game state up to the present time after the power is turned on. The jackpot base storage area stores the calculated jackpot base. Since the variation counter and the checksum storage area are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

[Input Process] In the input process (S101) of the modified example shown in FIG. Step S152 is provided instead, and steps S153 to S157 are provided instead of steps S119 to S121. As shown in FIG. 66, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signal from each sensor in step S110, and then determines in step S150 whether or not it is an entering ball detection signal. That is, a detection signal by the first starting opening sensor 20a, a detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 21a, a detection signal by the first big winning opening sensor 30a, a detection signal by the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and a detection signal by the normal winning opening sensor 27a. It is determined whether it is a detection signal or a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If it is an entering ball detection signal (YES in S150), after steps S112 and S113, counter addition processing, which will be described later, is executed (S151). However, in this modified example, if the detection signal is from the outlet sensor 16a, the prize ball command is not set in step S113. Then, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES at S115) and in a customer waiting state (YES at S116), a base calculation process, which will be described later, is executed (S152).

If it is determined in step S118 that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S153. In step S153, it is determined whether or not the current display flag is "1". The display flag of the modified example indicates a value of "1", "2" or "3". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S153), the display flag is switched to "2" (S154), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "1" (NO in S153), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S155). If it is "2" (YES at S155), the display flag is switched to "3" (S156), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "2" (NO at S155), it is "3", and the display flag is switched to "1" (S157), and this processing is finished.

In this modification, when displaying the base as described later, if the display flag is "1", the normal base is displayed, and if the display flag is "2", the time saving base is displayed and displayed. If the flag is "3", the jackpot base is displayed. Therefore, every time the person who checks the base operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the normal base, the display of the time saving base, and the display of the jackpot base.

[Counter Addition Processing] As shown in FIG. 67, in the counter addition processing (S151), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S160). That is, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is OFF and the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is OFF. If it is in the normal game state (YES at S160), the value of the normal 100-ball counter is incremented by "1" (S161). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal 100-ball counter has reached "100" or more (S162). If it is less than "100" (NO in S162), proceed to step S165. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S162), "1" is added to the value of the normal shot ball counter (S163), and "100" is subtracted from the value of the normal 100 ball counter ( S164), and proceed to step S165. In this way, it is possible to count the number of shot balls in the normal game state as 1 in 100 balls.

In step S165, it is determined whether or not the ball is entered into the out port 16. FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball-entering detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball is entered into the out port 16 (YES in S165), this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the out hole (NO in S165), the winning hole (first starting hole 20, second starting hole 21, first big winning hole 30, second big winning hole 35, normal winning hole 27) ). In this case, based on the type of incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. (S166), and the process ends. For example, in the case of winning in the normal winning hole 27 in the normal game state, the value of the normal total winning ball counter is incremented by "8".

Also, if it is determined that it is not in the normal game state in step S160, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S167). That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (YES in S167), only "1" is added to the value of the time saving 100 ball counter (S168). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving 100 ball counter has become "100" or more (S169). If it is less than "100" (NO in S169), proceed to step S172. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S169), the value of the time-saving ball number counter is incremented by "1" (S170), and the value of the time-saving 100 ball counter is subtracted by "100" ( S171), and proceed to step S172. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of balls fired in the time-saving state as 1 in 100 balls.

In step S172, it is determined whether or not the ball is entered into the out hole 16. FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball-entering detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball is entered into the out hole 16 (YES in S172), this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the ball is not entered into the out hole (NO in S172), the ball is determined based on the type of ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. , Add the value of the time-saving total award ball counter (S173), and finish this process. For example, in the time saving state, if the winning to the normal winning hole 27, only "8" is added to the value of the time saving total prize ball counter.

Moreover, if it determines with it not being a time saving state by step S167, it will be in a jackpot game state, and will progress to step S174. In step S174, "1" is added to the value of the counter for 100 big hits. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the 100-ball-jack counter has become "100" or more (S175). If it is less than "100" (NO at S175), proceed to step S178. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S175), "1" is added to the value of the counter for the number of shot balls fired (S176), and "100" is subtracted from the value of the counter for 100 jackpots (S176). S177) and proceed to step S178. In this way, it is possible to count the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state as one in 100 balls.

In step S178, it is determined whether or not the ball is entered into the out port 16. FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball-entering detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball is entered into the out hole 16 (YES in S178), this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the ball is not entered into the out hole (NO in S178), the ball is determined based on the type of ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. , the value of the jackpot total award ball number counter is added (S179), and this process is finished. For example, in the case of winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the big winning gaming state, the value of the big winning ball counter is incremented by "15".

[Base calculation processing] As shown in FIG. 68, in the base calculation processing (S152, specific calculation processing), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S180). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S180), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal shot ball number counter is equal to or greater than "1" (S181). If it is equal to or greater than "1" (YES in S181), normal base arithmetic processing is executed (S182). Specifically, the value of the normal total winning ball counter is divided by the value of the normal shot ball counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the normal base as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of multiplying by 100. Note that in the calculated normal base, the value to the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the normal base is stored in the normal base storage area (see FIG. 65(C)) of the special memory 89 (S183), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in step S181, if the value of the normal shot ball number counter is not "1" or more, it is "0", and the normal base cannot be calculated, so this processing ends.

Also, if it is determined that it is not in the normal game state in step S180, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S184). If it is in the time saving state (YES in S184), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving ball number counter is "1" or more (S185). If it is more than "1" (YES at S185), the time saving base calculation process is executed (S186). Specifically, the value of the time-saving total award ball number counter is divided by the value of the time-saving firing ball number counter. Thereby, it is possible to easily calculate the time saving base as a percentage value without performing multiplication processing of multiplying by 100. It should be noted that in the calculated time-saving base, the value to the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the time saving base is stored in the time saving base storage area (see FIG. 65(C)) of the special memory 89 (S187), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in step S185, if the value of the time-saving shot ball number counter is not "1" or more, it is "0", and the time-saving base cannot be calculated, so this processing ends.

Moreover, if it determines with it not being a time saving state by step S184, it will be in a jackpot game state, and will progress to step S188. In step S188, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter is greater than or equal to "1" (S188). If it is "1" or more (YES in S188), the jackpot base calculation process is executed (S189). Specifically, the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the jackpot base as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of multiplying by 100. It should be noted that in the calculated time-saving base, the value in the first place is rounded off. Then, the value of the jackpot base is stored in the jackpot base storage area (see FIG. 65(C)) of the special memory 89 (S190), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S188, if the value of the counter for the number of balls shot for a big hit is not "1" or more, the value is "0", and since the big hit base cannot be calculated, this processing ends.

[Output Processing] In the modified output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 69, step S2340 is provided in place of step S2304 in the first mode output processing (S107) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the game control microcomputer 81 performs base display processing (specific display processing), which will be described later, if the gaming machine frame is open (YES at S2301) and in a customer waiting state (YES at S2302). ) is executed (S2340). The base display processing is processing for displaying the base on the base display device 300 .

[Base Display Processing] In the base display processing (S2340), as shown in FIG. 70, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1" (S2601). The common flag indicates in which one of the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the base indicator 300 lighting control is performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2601), data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2602). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2603) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state of the fourth lighting region 340 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[1000] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2604). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2605). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the first lighting region 310 . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2606). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1", "2" or "3" by operating the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 66). If it is "2", it indicates a time-saving-based display, and if it is "3", it indicates a jackpot-based display.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2606), the data information D for displaying the tens digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 is sent from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2607). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2606), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2608). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2608), data information D for displaying the tens place of the time saving base stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 [0...7] is output (S2609). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2608), it is "3", and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0...7] for displaying the 100's digit of the jackpot base is output (S2610). After step S2607, S2609 or S2610, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2511). Thereby, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the first lighting region 310 . Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2612), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2601, as shown in FIG. 71, the process advances to step S2621 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2621), data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2622). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2623) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 in the previous time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0100] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2624). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2625). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the second lighting region 320 .

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2626). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2626), data information D for displaying the ones digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 is sent from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2627). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2626), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2628). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2628), from the input/output terminals D0 to D7, the data information D for displaying the ones digit of the time reduction base stored in the time reduction base storage area of the special memory 89 [0...7] is output (S2629). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2628), it is "3", and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0...7] for displaying the tens place of the jackpot base is output (S2630). After step S2627, S2629 or S2630, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2531). Thereby, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the second lighting region 320 . Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2632), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2621, as shown in FIG. 72, the flow advances to step S2641 to determine whether or not the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2641), first, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2642). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2643) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0010] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2644). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2645). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the third lighting region 330 .

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2646). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2646), data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2647). That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[01100000]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2651), "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. FIG. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two-digit number displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is displayed to the person who checks the bass. Make them understand that the number (base) is usually the base.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2646), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2648). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2648), data information D[0...7] for displaying "2" is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2549). That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[11011010]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2651), "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. FIG. In this way, in this embodiment, if "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who checks the bass can see the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Let them understand that the number (base) is based on short working hours.

On the other hand, in step S2648, if the display flag is not "2", it is "3". In this case, the data information D[0...7] for displaying "3" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2650). That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[11110010]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2651), "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. FIG. In this way, in this embodiment, if "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two-digit number displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is displayed to the person who checks the bass. Make them understand that the number (base) is the jackpot base. After step S2651, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2652), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2641, it means that the common flag is "4", and as shown in FIG. 73, the process proceeds to step S2661. In step S2661, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2662) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Next, data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0001] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2663). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2664). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the fourth lighting region 340 .

Subsequently, the total number of shot balls (the sum of the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time-saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state) since the power was turned on is "100000". It is determined whether or not it is more than Specifically, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the time reduction shot ball number counter value and the jackpot shot ball number counter value is equal to or greater than "1000". If the total number of shot balls is "100000" or more (YES in S2665), the process proceeds to step S2666. On the other hand, if it is not "100000" or more (NO in S2665), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter in the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2667). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time reaches "3000". If "3000" or more (YES in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2666. In step S2666, data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=D[01100000]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2669), "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. FIG. In this way, in the present embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the person who confirms the base will be able to confirm that the base being displayed (normal base, time-saving base, jackpot base) has converged to some extent. value.

On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is less than "100000" (NO at S2665) and the value of the variation counter is less than "3000" (NO at S2667), the process proceeds to step S2668. In step S2668, data information D[0...7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, it outputs data information D[0...7]=[11111100]. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2669), "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. FIG. In this way, in this embodiment, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the base being displayed (normal base, short time base, jackpot base) has not yet converged to the person who checks the base. Make them understand that it is a reference value that may not be correct. After step S2669, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2670), and this processing ends.

As described above, according to the modified example of the first embodiment, it is possible to confirm the base on the base indicator 300 . In particular, the base can be checked separately for each game state, such as the normal base (base in normal game state), time-saving base (base in time-saving state), and jackpot base (base in jackpot game state). Therefore, it is possible to correctly judge the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the base. If it is a normal base, for example, if it is in the range of 30% to 39%, it should be judged as within the normal range. Well, if it is a jackpot base, for example, if it is in the range of 600% to 800%, it can be judged as being within the normal range. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first mode, when the memory contents of the special memory 89 are erased, a clear image showing the characters "special memory cleared" is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62(A). CL1 was displayed. On the other hand, in the modification of the first form, for example, as shown in FIG. good. Also, at this time, a special sound suggesting that the base has been initialized may be output from the speaker 67 . Alternatively, predetermined lamps (the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5) may be caused to emit light in a special light emission mode.

<Second form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the second form will be explained based on FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. The special memory 89 of the first form was a volatile storage means (DRAM). On the other hand, in the second form, the special memory 89A is a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM). Note that the special memory 89A may be non-volatile storage means other than EEPROM, and may be flash memory, for example. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the special memory 89A of the second form has a storage area for 100 balls, an actual total number of prize balls storage area, a prize ball number storage area, and continuous prize balls. A number storage area and a variation number storage area are provided. The 100-ball storage area stores the value of the 100-ball counter that has been measured until the power is cut off. The actual total winning ball number storage area stores the value of the actual total winning ball number counter that has been measured until the power is cut off. The award ball number storage area stores the value of the award ball number counter that has been measured until the power is cut off. The continuous prize ball number storage area stores the value of the continuous prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power failure. The change number storage area stores the value of the change number counter that has been measured until the power failure. The reason why these values (hereinafter referred to as "measured values for output rate display") are stored in the special memory 89A is as follows.

As described above, backup power can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 to the special memory 89 (volatile storage means) of the first form. The stored memory contents can be held. However, it is conceivable that even backup power cannot be supplied to the special memory 89 due to disconnection, poor contact, or the like, and the contents stored in the special memory 89 are erased. In addition, intentionally unplugging the power plug 160 (see FIG. 7) to cause a power failure for several days may cause the memory contents of the special memory 89 to be erased.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, a special memory (non-volatile memory) 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means, is provided in order to deal with the above-described problem, and the measured value for output rate display is stored in the special memory 89A at the time of power failure. I have to. As a result, even if the backup power source is not supplied, it is possible to avoid erasing the contents stored in the special memory 89A (measured values for output ratio display). As a result, when the power is restored, it is possible to restart the measurement from the output rate display measurement value that was stored immediately before the power failure occurred.

Here, a method of directly storing (storing) in the special memory 89A each time the output rate display measurement value is measured is conceivable. However, in the case of this method, access to the special memory 89A, which is non-volatile storage means, becomes frequent, so the special memory 89A deteriorates quickly. That is, the non-volatile storage means cannot cope with high frequency reading and writing unlike the volatile storage means.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74A, a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, is provided with a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball counter, and a prize ball number. A counter, a consecutive prize ball number counter, a change number counter, a role ratio storage area, and a continuous role ratio storage area are provided. As a result, in normal times (when the monitored voltage is higher than 17 V) when there is no power interruption, even if the output rate display measurement value is measured, the game RAM 84A is accessed. It does not access memory 89A. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of use (degradation) of the special memory 89A.

Only when the power is cut off, the output rate display measurement values measured so far are transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the 100 ball counter of the game RAM 84A, the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter, the value of the prize ball number counter, the value of the consecutive prize ball number counter, and the value of the variation counter. are stored in the special memory 89A in the 100-ball storage area, the actual total number of prize balls storage area, the prize number storage area, the continuous prize number storage area, and the number of fluctuations storage area. As a result, it is possible to avoid erasing the output rate display measurement value even if an abnormal situation such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power interruption for several days occurs.

After that, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), if all the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are cleared, the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It has become. That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement can be restarted from the output rate display measurement value stored when the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the memory contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the measured values for displaying the payout rate stored in the game RAM 84A (the value of the 100-ball counter, the value of the actual total prize-ball counter, the The value of the prize ball number counter, the value of the continuous prize ball number counter, the value of the variation counter), and the measured value for displaying the rate stored in the special memory 89A (stored in the storage area for 100 balls) value, the value stored in the award number storage area, the value stored in the continuous award number storage area, and the value stored in the number of variation storage area).

Then, if the result of the collation is a match, it is determined that the payout ratio display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the payout ratio display measurement value. On the other hand, if the result of the above collation does not match, it is determined that the measured value for the payout ratio display stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and the payout ratio display stored in the special memory 89A is judged to be abnormal. Measured values for game are transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A which is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on process] In the power-on process (S001) of the second mode shown in FIG. 75, steps S021 to S024 of the first power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. S027 is provided. As shown in FIG. 75, when the game control microcomputer 81 clears all the information stored in the game RAM 84A in step S018, the process proceeds to step S026 via steps S019 and S020. In step S026, the payout rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A, and the process proceeds to step S025. As a result, even if the memory contents of the game RAM 84A are erased when the power is turned on, the measurement can be restarted from the output rate display measurement value transferred to the special memory 89A when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to display the yield as a converged value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values of the game RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S027 via steps S016 and S017. In step S027, the payout ratio display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is collated with the payout ratio display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of the output rate display measurement values match each other (YES in S027), it is determined that the output rate display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A are normal, and without proceeding to step S026, Proceed to step S025. On the other hand, if even one of the measured values for the rate display does not match (NO in S027), it is determined that the measured value for the rate display stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal. , the measured values for display of pay rate stored in the special memory 89A are transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the payout display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by double checking the checksum of the game RAM 84A and the payout display measurement value. is.

[Prize ball counter addition process] In the second form of prize ball counter addition process (S114) shown in FIG. Steps S210 to S213, S215, S216 and S218 are provided instead of S206, S207 and S209. Steps S201 to S204, S206, S207, and S209 of the first form are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 11C) provided in the special memory 89, whereas steps S210 to S213, S215, S216, and S218 are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 74A) provided in the game RAM 84A. Since only the above point is the only change in the first form of the number-of-balls-counter addition process (S114), a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Power Interruption Monitoring Process] In the second form of power interruption monitoring process (S108) shown in FIG. is provided. As shown in FIG. 77, the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2908 via steps S2902 and S2903 if a power-off signal is input in step S2901 (YES in S2901). In step S2908, the output rate display measurement values measured by each counter provided in the game RAM 84A until the power failure are transferred (copied) to each storage area (see FIG. 74B) provided in the special memory 89A. ). In this way, when the power is cut off, the measured value for output ratio display is held in the special memory 89A.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, by storing the output rate display measurement value in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means at the time of power failure, the backup power is not supplied. However, it is possible to avoid erasing the output rate display measurement value. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to transfer the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A at the time of the previous power failure to the game RAM 84A, which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the output rate display measurement value that was stored at the time of power failure.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the measured output rate display measurement value is stored in the game RAM 84A, which is a volatile storage means, in a normal time when power failure does not occur. Only at certain times, the measured values for output ratio display are stored (transferred) to the special memory 89A, which is non-volatile storage means. Therefore, since the special memory 89A is not frequently accessed, the output rate can be displayed in the event of an abnormal situation such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power failure for several days while suppressing the frequency of use (degradation) of the special memory 89A. It is possible to avoid erasing the measurement values for Other effects of the second embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modified Example of Second Mode>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the second mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. In the second embodiment, each value (measured value for output rate display) measured for calculating the output rate at the time of power failure is stored in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second form, each value (measured value for base display) measured for calculating the base is stored in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means, when the power is cut off. It is designed to let

As shown in FIG. 78(B), the special memory 89A of the modification of the second form has a storage area for normal 100 balls, a normal number-of-balls-storage area, a normal total number-of-balls storage area, and a time-saving 100-ball storage area. Storage area for balls, storage area for the number of balls fired in a short time, storage area for the total number of winning balls in a short time, storage area for 100 jackpot balls, storage area for the number of shot balls for a jackpot, storage area for the total number of jackpot balls, and the number of fluctuations. A storage area is provided.

The normal 100-ball storage area stores the value of the normal 100-ball counter that has been measured until the power is cut off. The normal shot ball number storage area stores the value of the normal shot ball number counter that has been measured until the power is turned off. The normal total number of prize balls storage area stores the value of the normal total number of prize balls counter which has been measured until the power is cut off. The time-saving 100-ball storage area stores the value of the time-saving 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power failure. The time reduction shot ball number storage area stores the value of the time reduction shot ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power failure. The time-saving total prize-ball number storage area stores the value of the time-saving total prize-ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. The storage area for 100 jackpot balls stores the value of the counter for 100 jackpot balls that has been measured until the power is cut off. The jackpot shot ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter that has been measured until the power is cut off. The jackpot total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter that has been measured until the power failure. As in the second mode, the variation frequency storage area stores the value of the variation frequency counter that has been measured until the power failure. The reason why these values (hereinafter referred to as "base display measurement values") are stored in the special memory 89A is the same as the reason why the yield display measurement values are stored in the special memory 89A in the second embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted as appropriate.

In the modification of the second mode, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, has a normal 100-ball counter, a normal shot-ball counter, a normal total Prize ball counter, normal base memory area, time saving 100 ball counter, time saving ball counter, time saving total prize ball number counter, time saving base memory area, counter for 100 jackpot balls, jackpot ball count counter, jackpot total prize balls A number counter, a jackpot base storage area, and a variation number counter are provided. As a result, in normal times (when the monitored voltage is higher than 17 V) when there is no power interruption, even if the measured value for the base display is measured, the game RAM 84A is accessed, and the special memory 89A is not accessed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of use (degradation) of the special memory 89A.

Then, only when the power is cut off, the measured values for base display that have been measured so far are transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the normal 100 ball counter, the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the value of the normal total winning ball number counter, the value of the time reduction 100 ball counter, and the value of the time reduction ball counter of the game RAM 84A. , the value of the time-saving total prize ball counter, the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter, the value of the jackpot shot ball counter, the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter, and the value of the variation counter are stored in a special memory. 89A memory area for normal 100 balls, normal number of balls fired, memory area for total number of normal prize balls, memory area for short 100 balls, memory area for number of short shot balls, memory area for total number of short prize balls, for 100 jackpots Stored in the storage area, the number of shot balls for the jackpot, the total number of shots for the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations, respectively. This makes it possible to avoid erasing the base display measurement values even if an abnormal situation such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power interruption for several days occurs.

After that, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), if all the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are cleared, the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It's becoming That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measured value stored when the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the memory contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is collated with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A.

If the result of the collation is a match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from that base display measurement value. On the other hand, if the result of the collation does not match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and The measured value is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A which is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the modification of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 79, the power-on processing (S001) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. A step S028 is provided. If it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values of the game RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S028 via steps S016 and S017. In step S028, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A and the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A are collated. If the base display measurement values match each other (YES in S028), it is determined that the output rate display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A are normal, and the process proceeds to step S026 without proceeding to step S026. Proceed to S025. On the other hand, if even one value of each base display measurement value does not match (NO in S028), it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal. The base display measurement value stored in the memory 89A is transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by double checking the checksum of the game RAM 84A and the base display measurement value. .

In addition, in the modification of the first form, the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed as the process of adding each counter provided in the special memory 89. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second form, substantially the same processing as the counter addition processing (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed as processing for adding each counter provided in the game RAM 84A. ing. Also, in the power supply monitoring process (S108) of the second form, in step S2908, the output rate display measured value is transferred (copied) to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A. On the other hand, in the power-off monitoring process (S108) of the modified example of the second embodiment, instead of the process of step S2908, the base display measurement values are transferred to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A. It's like

As described above, according to the modification of the second embodiment, by storing the base display measurement value in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means, even if the backup power is not supplied, It is possible to avoid erasing the base display measurement value. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to transfer the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A at the time of the previous power failure to the game RAM 84A, which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the base display measurement value stored at the time of power failure. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, but are only based on the output rate, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the third form will be described based on FIG. The output indicator 300 of the first form is arranged on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the yield indicator 300 is arranged on the rear side case 401A of the main board case 400A. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the output indicator 300 of the third form is integrally attached to the lower left portion of the rear case 401A and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC1. ing. Therefore, similarly to the first mode, the lighting control of the output indicator 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Here, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the output indicator 300 of the third form is arranged in parallel with the mounting surface (rear surface) 80a of the main control board 80, and faces the integrated circuit IC9. It is in. Therefore, the output indicator 300 obstructs the view of the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a, making it difficult to check the product number of the integrated circuit IC. The mounting surface 80a is the board surface of the main control board 80 on which a large number of integrated circuits such as the game control microcomputer 81 and the integrated circuit IC9 are mounted.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the rear side case 401A to which the yield indicator 300 is attached is configured to be movable. Specifically, the rear case 401A is rotatably supported on the left upper portion of the front case 402A via a rotation pin P1. Further, the rear side case 401A is rotatably supported on the left side lower portion of the front side case 402A via a rotation pin P2 at the left side lower portion. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 80(A), (B) and (C), the rear side case 401A is rotatable on the left end side around the rotation axis Q1 extending in the vertical direction. In other words, the yield indicator 300 can be rotated to reduce the area facing the mounting surface 80a. When the rear side case 401A rotates to the position shown in FIG. 80(C), the output indicator 300 is in a non-opposing position where it does not face the entire mounting surface 80a. In the third embodiment, the rear side case 401A and the rotating pins P1 and P2 correspond to the movement mechanism.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a from remaining hidden by the yield indicator 300. FIG. Furthermore, by not arranging the output rate indicator 300 on the main control board 80, each component on the main control board 80 must be brought together like the first mode to secure the layout space for the output rate indicator 300. It is possible to solve problems that do not exist.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, it is possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a is visible by the rotation mechanism using the rear side case 401A and the rotation pins P1 and P2. Then, the output indicator 300 is rotated from the facing position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 80(A)) to a non-facing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (see FIG. 80(C)). can be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9, and furthermore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a. Other effects of the third embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

Next, based on FIG. 81, the 1st modification of a 3rd form is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 81(A), the yield indicator 300 is attached to the lower left portion of the rear side case 401B of the main board case 400B, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC2. . The rear side case 401B is rotatably supported on the left side upper portion of the front side case 402B via a rotation pin P3. The rear case 401B is rotatably supported on the right upper portion of the front case 402B via a rotation pin P4.

Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 81A, 81B, and 81C, the rear case 401B is rotatable around the rotation axis Q2 extending in the left-right direction on the upper end side. By rotating the rear side case 401B, the output indicator 300 is moved from the facing position facing the integrated circuit IC 9 (see FIG. 81A) to the non-facing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (see FIG. 81A). (C)). In this first modification, the rear side case 401A and the rotating pins P3 and P4 correspond to the movement mechanism. As described above, the third embodiment and the first modified example differ mainly in the rotational directions of the rear side cases 401A and 401B. Therefore, the effects of the first modification are substantially the same as the effects of the above-described third embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, based on FIG. 82, the 2nd modification of a 3rd form is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 82(A), output indicator 300 is attached to the lower left portion of rear side case 401C of main board case 400C and is connected to main control board 80 via flexible cable FC3. . The lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C is placed on the upper side of the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C, and is slidable in the left-right direction.

However, the upper portion of the left end surface of the rear side case 401C is locked by an upper locking piece 402a provided on the upper left portion of the front side case 402C. Further, the lower portion of the left end surface of the rear case 401C is engaged with a lower engaging piece 402b provided at the lower left portion of the front case 402C. These locks restrict the lateral sliding of the rear case 401C. On the other hand, when these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the bottom surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C becomes slidable leftward with respect to the bottom surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C. In this second modification, the rear side case 401C and the front side case 402C correspond to the movement mechanism.

According to the second modified example of the third embodiment, the slide mechanism using the rear case 401C and the front case 402C makes it possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a is visible. Then, the output indicator 300 is moved leftward from the facing position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 82A) to a non-facing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (see FIG. 82B). can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9, and furthermore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a. Other operational effects of the second modification are substantially the same as those of the above-described third embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, based on FIG. 83, the 3rd modification of a 3rd form is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 83(A), output indicator 300 is attached to the lower left portion of rear case 401D of main board case 400D and is connected to main control board 80 via flexible cable FC4. . The left end portion 401Da of the rear side case 401D is fitted to the left end portion 402Da of the front side case 402D in an uneven manner so that it can slide vertically. A right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D is fitted to a right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D in a concave-convex manner, and is slidable in the vertical direction.

However, the lower surface of the left end portion 401Da of the rear side case 401D is locked to the left locking piece 402c provided below the left end portion 402Da of the front side case 402D. The lower surface of the right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D is locked to the right locking piece 402d provided below the right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D. These engagements restrict the vertical sliding of the rear case 401D. On the other hand, when these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left end 401Da and right end 401Db of the rear case 401D are positioned relative to the left end 402Da and right end 402Db of the front case 402D. You can slide up and down. In this third modified example, the rear side case 401D and the front side case 402D correspond to the moving mechanism section. As described above, the second modification and the third modification mainly differ only in the sliding direction of the rear side cases 401C and 401D. Therefore, the effects of the third modification are substantially the same as the effects of the second modification described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the above-described third embodiment (see FIG. 80), the first modification of the third embodiment (see FIG. 81), the second modification of the third embodiment (see FIG. 82), and the third modification of the third embodiment In the example (see FIG. 83), the output indicator 300 is configured to be movable. However, instead of the output indicator 300, the base indicator 300 as described in the modified example of the first form or the modified example of the second form may be configured to be movable. The effects of this case are the same as those of the above-described third embodiment or each of its modifications, but only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth form will be described based on FIGS. 84 to 88. FIG. In the first mode, as shown in FIG. 7, the payout rate can be displayed on the payout rate display device 300 as a component provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . On the other hand, in the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 84, an external pay rate display device (external device) 900, which is not a component provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the pay rate. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the external output rate display device 900 includes a display section 910, a changeover switch 920, a connection cable 930, and a connector CN4. The display unit 910 is composed of a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display having four lighting regions, similarly to the above-described output indicator 300 . The changeover switch 920 switches the external output rate display device 900 between an ON state and an OFF state. The connection cable 930 is a flexible cable having a connector CN4 at one end and having a certain length to facilitate connection of the connector CN4. The connector CN4 is connected to a connector CN3 provided on the main control board 80, which will be described later.

In the fourth mode, a power display signal is output to an external power display device 900 by a connector (connecting portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80. FIG. The output rate display signal is a signal for causing the external output rate display device 900 to display the output rate. It should be noted that the connector CN3 is a dedicated connector provided separately from each connector provided on the existing main control board 80 . However, an existing connector may be used so that the output percentage display signal is output from the connector.

As shown in FIG. 84(B), the connector CN4 of the external power display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, and the changeover switch 920 is operated to turn on the external power display device 900. . As a result, a power display signal is output from the main control board 80 to the external power display device 900 through the connector CN3. As a result, the external output rate display device 900 to which the output rate display signal is input displays the output rate and the displayed output rate in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910 in the same manner as in the first mode (see FIG. 26). It is possible to indicate whether it is a feature rate or a continuous feature rate, and whether the payout displayed is a valid value or a reference value.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 80 is provided with a serial communication circuit 170 . This serial communication circuit 170 is for performing serial communication with the external output rate display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. FIG. The external output display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. Through these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a payout ratio display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external payout ratio display device 900 by serial communication.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form is configured in the same way as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information. In other words, unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first form (see FIG. 15), a new circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not added. This is because the circuit unit for displaying the output rate is provided in the external output rate display device 900 . Therefore, it is possible to display the payout rate on the external payout rate display device 900 without changing the design of the existing drive circuit 200F that displays the game information.

[Input Process] In the input process (S101) of the fourth form shown in FIG. 87, steps S123 and S124 are newly provided in comparison with the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that it is not the winning detection signal in step S111 (NO in S111), the process proceeds to step S123. In step S123, it is determined whether or not a connection signal has been input from the external power output display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170 or not. The connection signal is a signal output from the external power display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external power display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal has been input (YES at S123), the serial communication circuit setting process is executed to cause the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external output rate display device 900 (S124), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if the connection signal has not been input (NO in S123), step S124 is bypassed and the process proceeds to step S122.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the fourth form shown in FIG. 88, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes game display processing (S2303, see FIG. 53). That is, in the output process of the fourth form (S107), unlike the output process of the first form (S107) shown in FIG. Therefore, the game display process (S2303) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to display the game information on the game display device 40 while displaying the payout rate on the external payout rate display device 900 . After step S2303, it is determined whether or not the connection signal described above is input (S2315). If not entered (NO in S2315), proceed to step S2305.

On the other hand, if it is input (YES in S2315), signal output processing is executed (S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2305. In the signal output process (S2316), the output rate display signal is output to the connector CN3 via the serial communication circuit 170. FIG. This payout ratio display signal includes information on the payout ratio (character ratio, continuous role ratio) calculated by the payout ratio calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) (specifically, stored in the role ratio storage area). value stored in the continuous role ratio storage area), information on the value of the variation number counter, information on the value of the actual total prize number counter, and the like. As a result, the external payout ratio display device 900 connected to the connector CN3 displays the payout ratio, character product ratio, or continuous character ratio on the display unit 910 based on the input payout ratio display signal. It is possible to indicate whether it is a valid value or a reference value, and so on.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is possible. Furthermore, the connector CN4 of the output rate display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 only when the output rate is to be checked, and when the output rate is not to be checked, the external output rate is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(A). Connector CN4 of device 900 can be disconnected from connector CN3. In other words, unlike the above-described first mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not always provided with the payout rate indicator 300 for displaying the payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration that allows confirmation of the output rate with a small design change to the existing pachinko game machine.

In short, since it is not necessary to dispose the output rate indicator 300 and the circuit section for displaying the output rate on the main control board 80, each component on the main control board 80 can be put together as in the first embodiment and the arrangement space can be reduced. It is possible to solve the problem of having to ensure In contrast to the increase in cost of providing the pay rate display device 300 for all pachinko game machines, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost by providing only the connector CN3 as in the fourth mode. is. That is, when confirming the output rate, it is sufficient to confirm pachinko gaming machines one by one, and it is not necessary to confirm a plurality of pachinko gaming machines at the same time. Therefore, since it is sufficient to prepare one external output rate display device 900 for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 of the fourth embodiment, it can be implemented at low cost. Since the external display device 900 is an external device, it is possible to prepare many types (variations) of external devices.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the payout ratio display signal includes information on the payout ratio (accessory ratio, continuous role ratio) calculated by the payout ratio calculation process (S117). . In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 calculates the payout rate, and the external payout rate display device 900 does not calculate the payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to carry out the calculation with a device having only a display function without preparing a special device capable of calculating the output rate as an external device.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 80 has the serial communication circuit 170, so that the external output rate display device connected to the connector CN3 by serial communication It is possible to have the 900 display the output rate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of wires (signals) for displaying the output rate, compared to the case where the output rate is displayed on the external output rate display device 900 by parallel communication. In other words, by reducing the number of wires connecting the main control board 80 and the external power output display device 900, it is possible to reduce the design changes to the main control board 80. FIG.

In addition, in the above-described fourth form, the information of the payout rate (accessory rate, continuous role rate) calculated by the payout rate calculation process (S117) is included in the payout rate display signal. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the output rate display signal does not include information about the output rate, but includes information on the value of the actual total prize ball counter (total number of prize balls) and the value of the prize ball counter (number of prize balls). and information on the value of the continuous prize ball number counter (the number of consecutive prize balls). In this case, when the output rate display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the output rate display signal, the information on the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls, and the number of continuous prize balls are displayed. Calculate the output rate based on . Then, the external output rate display device displays the calculated output rate on the display unit. In this way, unlike the fourth mode, the pachinko game machine 1 can not calculate the pay rate, and the burden of control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible to omit the output rate calculation process (117).

<Modified Example of Fourth Mode>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the modification of the fourth form will be described based on FIG. In the fourth mode, an external pay rate display device (external device) 900, which is not a constituent part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the pay rate. On the other hand, in the modification of the fourth form, an external base display device (external device) 900, which is not a constituent part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the base. It should be noted that the external base display device 900 has exactly the same hardware configuration as the above-described external output ratio display device 900 (see FIG. 84), but is simply renamed.

In the modification of the fourth mode, a base display signal is output to an external base display device 900 by a connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80. FIG. The base display signal is a signal for causing the external base display device 900 to display the base. This base display signal includes the information of the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation processing (S152, see FIG. 68), and is counted by the counter addition processing (S161, see FIG. 67). Information on the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the value of the short time shot ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter is included. In addition, information on the value of the fluctuation number counter is also included.

By connecting the connector CN4 (see FIG. 84(B)) of the external base display device 900 to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, as in the above-described fourth form, the main control board 80 through the connector CN3 A base display signal may be output to an external base display device 900 . As a result, the external base display device 900 to which the base display signal is input displays the base and the displayed base in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910 (see FIG. 84(B)). It is possible to indicate what the jackpot base is and whether the displayed base is a valid value or a reference value.

Note that the main control board 80 is provided with the serial communication circuit 170 (see FIG. 85) as described in the fourth embodiment. The serial communication circuit 170 is for serial communication with the external base display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. FIG. The external base display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. Through these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a base display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external base display device 900 by serial communication.

[Input processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modification of the fourth form shown in FIG. 89, steps S158 and S159 are newly provided for the input processing (S101) of the modification of the first form shown in FIG. It is As shown in FIG. 89, if the game control microcomputer 81 judges that it is not the entering ball detection signal at step S150 (NO at S150), it proceeds to step S158. In step S158, it is determined whether or not a connection signal has been input from the external base display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170 or not. The connection signal is a signal output from the external base display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external base display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal has been input (YES at S158), serial communication circuit setting processing is executed to cause the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external base display device 900 (S159), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if the connection signal has not been input (NO in S158), step S159 is bypassed and the process proceeds to step S122.

As described above, according to the modification of the fourth mode, the base can be confirmed by displaying the base on the display section 910 of the external base display device 900 (see FIG. 84(B)). Furthermore, it is possible to connect the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 to the connector CN3 only when checking the base, and remove the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 from the connector CN3 when not checking the base. (See FIG. 84(A)). Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration that allows confirmation of the base with a small design change to the existing pachinko game machine. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the modification of the said 4th form, the base display signal contained the information of the normal base calculated by base calculation processing (S152, FIG. 68 reference), a short time base, and a jackpot base. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the base display signal does not include information about the base, and includes the value of the normal shot number counter, the value of the short shot shot number counter, and the number of jackpot shots counted by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67). In addition to the counter value information, the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the value of the time-saving total prize ball counter, and the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter are included. In this case, when the external base display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the base display signal, the base (normal base, short time base, jackpot base) is calculated based on the values of each counter described above. The external base display device then displays the calculated base on the display. In this way, unlike the modification of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 can not calculate the base, and the load of control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible to omit the base calculation process (S152).

<Fifth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the fifth form will be explained based on FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. In the above-described first form, even when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300, the previously displayed output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300 as it is. On the other hand, in the fifth form, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate indicator 300, as shown in FIG. there is That is, the output rate lighting section LB7 is lit in the first lighting area 310, the output rate lighting section LB15 is lit in the second lighting area 320, the output rate lighting section LB23 is lit in the third lighting area 330, In the fourth lighting area 340, the output rate lighting section LB31 is lit. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[Output Processing] In the fifth form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 91, steps S2311, S2312, and S2313 are newly provided to the first form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES at S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S2302), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the rate display process. (S2304), the change completion flag is turned off (S2311). The change completion flag indicates that the display of "----" on the pay rate indicator 300 has been completed, as will be described later.

On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO at S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), the payout rate is not displayed on the payout rate indicator 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), display change processing, which will be described later, is executed in order to display "----" on the rate indicator 300 (S2313). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES at S2312), the display of "----" is completed on the output rate indicator 300, so the game display process is executed as described above (S2303). .

[Display Change Processing] As shown in FIG. 92, in the display change processing (S2313), first, it is determined whether or not the change flag is "1" (S2801). The change flag is set to a value of either "1", "2", "3" or "4". It indicates whether to display "-" in the area. If the change flag is "1" (YES in S2801), the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2802), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is changed to " H" (S2803). Subsequently, in order to display "-", the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2804), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2805). As a result, in the first lighting area 310, only the output rate lighting section LB7 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "2" (S2806), and this processing ends.

If the change flag is not "1" in step S2801, then it is determined whether or not the change flag is "2" (S2807). If the change flag is "2" (YES in S2807), the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2808), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is changed to " H" (S2809). Subsequently, in order to display "-", the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2810), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2811). As a result, in the second lighting area 320, only the output rate lighting section LB15 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "3" (S2812), and this process ends.

If the change flag is not "2" in step S2807, then it is determined whether or not the change flag is "3" (S2813). If the change flag is "3" (YES in S2813), the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2814), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is changed to " H" (S2815). Subsequently, in order to display "-", the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2816), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2817). As a result, in the third lighting area 330, only the output rate lighting section LB23 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "4" (S2818), and this processing ends.

If the change flag is not "3" in step S2813, it means that the change flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2819. In step S2819, data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from input/output terminals D0 to D3, and then the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" (S2820). Subsequently, in order to display "-", the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2821), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2822). As a result, in the fourth lighting area 340, only the output rate lighting section LB31 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change completion flag is turned ON (S2823), the change flag is set to "1" (S2824), and this processing ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth form, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer waiting state is established, the first lighting region 310 of the output rate indicator 300 And the mode of the second lighting area 320 (display area) becomes a number mode (for example, "60", see FIG. 26) indicating the output rate. This makes it possible to check the output rate. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (while the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the rate indicator 300 becomes "--" (non-numerical mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the output rate is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that the payout ratio is the current payout ratio while the game is in progress because the payout ratio when the display condition is satisfied remains displayed as it is. In particular, even when the game machine frame 50 is opened and the pay rate display device 300 is viewed, the special symbols are still displayed in a variable manner, or the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the game continues. is possible. At this time, it is possible to prevent the person who checks the turnout rate from judging whether or not there is an abnormality based on the turnout rate remaining displayed before.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth form, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols or during the control to the jackpot game state (when in the game control state), the output rate is displayed without calculating the output rate. The mode of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the device 300 is changed to "--". That is, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate indicator 300, the useless control process of calculating the output rate is not performed. In addition, in the game control state, the burden of control processing is greater than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of control processing by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) by not performing the calculation and display of the output rate in the game control state in which the load of the control processing is heavy. is. Other effects of the fifth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

Note that in the fifth mode, when the display conditions are not met (the output rate display process (S2304) is not executed), as shown in FIG. "--" is displayed in the second lighting area 320). However, as long as it can be recognized that the payout rate is not displayed, a display mode other than "--" may be used, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the output rate can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which each output rate lighting unit is turned off), or a predetermined specific number such as "77" may be set. number mode (a mode different from the number mode indicating the yield rate).

<Modified Example of Fifth Mode>
Based on FIG. 93, the pachinko game machine 1 of the modification of the fifth form will be described. In the fifth form, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display device 300, "----" is displayed on the output rate display device 300 (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, in the modification of the fifth form, when the base is not displayed on the base display 300, the base display 300 is configured to display "----".

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. is provided in As shown in FIG. 93, the game control microcomputer 81 performs base display processing ( S2340), and turn off the change completion flag (S2311). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO at S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), the base is not displayed on the base display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), the display change processing described above is executed in order to display "----" on the base display 300 (S2313, see FIG. 92). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES at S2312), the display of "----" is completed on the base display 300, and the game display process is executed as described above (S2303).

As described above, according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer waiting state is satisfied, the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 310 of the base display 300 are displayed. The form of the lighting area 320 (display area) becomes the number form indicating the base. This makes it possible to check the base. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (while the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the base display 300 becomes "--" (non-numerical mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the base is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the base from being displayed as it is when the display condition is satisfied during the progress of the game and to misunderstand that it is the current base. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described fifth embodiment, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the modification of the fifth form, when the display condition is not satisfied (the base display process (S2340) is not executed), the display areas (the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320) in which the base can be displayed are displayed. "--" is displayed. However, if it can be recognized that the base is not displayed, a display mode other than "--" may be used, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the base can be displayed may be a non-display mode (a mode in which nothing is displayed), or a predetermined specific number mode such as "77" (a number indicating the base). A different aspect) may be used.

<Sixth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the sixth form will be described based on FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. In the first form, the output displayed by the output rate indicator 300 indicates that the role product ratio does not exceed 70% (70%) or that the continuous role product ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). It is to be confirmed by the rate. On the other hand, in the sixth mode, it is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 that the role product ratio does not exceed 70% or that the continuous role product ratio does not exceed 60%. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 94, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means, light emitting means) 350 is arranged on the main control board 80 and is capable of changing the light emission mode. The game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 changes the mode of the special LED 350 to the light-off mode shown in FIG. 94(A), the lighting mode (first light-emitting mode) shown in FIG. ) can be switched to the flashing mode (second light emission mode) shown in FIG.

In the sixth form, when the output rate is displayed, the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is first turned on to the present time is less than 10000, and the special If the number of times of variation of symbol variation display is less than 3000, the mode of special LED 350 is turned off. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the off state is made aware of the possibility that the output rate has not yet converged.

Also, when displaying the output rate, if the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, the character ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous character ratio does not exceed 60%. If not, the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode. As a result, a person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made to know that the pachinko game machine 1 has not been illegally remodeled as a result of the output rate converging to some extent. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, the role ratio exceeds 70% (specified value) or the continuous role ratio exceeds 60% (specified value). If it exceeds, the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the flashing mode is made to understand that the pachinko game machine 1 is illegally remodeled or broken as a result of the output rate converging to some extent.

[Output Processing] In the output processing of the sixth form (S107) shown in FIG. 95, steps S2308, S2309 and S2310 are newly provided to the output processing of the first form (S107) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or if the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game RAM 84 It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). The lighting mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 in the lighting mode, and the blinking mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 in the blinking mode. If these data are set (YES in S2308), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). The extinguishing mode data is data for putting the special LED 350 into an extinguishing mode. In this way, when the game information relating to the progress of the game is displayed on the game display 40, the special LED 350 is always turned off, and power consumption can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES at S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S2302), the special LED processing is executed after executing the rate display processing (S2304). (S2310).

[Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the special LED processing (S2310), whether the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter in the special memory 89 is "100" or more (the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more). It is determined whether or not (S2701). If it is less than "100" (NO in S2701), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter in the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2702). If it is less than "3000" (NO in S2702), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2708), and this process ends. In this way, when the total number of prize balls is less than 10000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is "100" or more (YES at S2701), or if the value of the variation number counter is "3000" or more (YES at S2702), then display It is determined whether the flag is "1" (S2703). If it is "1" (YES in S2703), then it is determined whether or not the value of the role product ratio stored in the role product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "70" (S2704). If not (NO in S2704), the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2707), and this process ends. Also, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2703), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous role product ratio stored in the continuous role product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "60". (S2705). If not (NO in S2705), the lighting mode data is set (S2707), and this processing ends. In this way, on the condition that the output rate is an effective value converged to some extent, when the character ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous character ratio does not exceed 60%, the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. Become.

On the other hand, if the value of the role product ratio exceeds "70" in step S2704, or if the value of the continuous role product ratio exceeds "60" in step S2705, a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2706), and the process ends. Thus, on the condition that the output rate is an effective value that converges to some extent, when the character ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 changes to a flashing mode. Become.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth form, when the character ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode or the extinguishing mode to the flashing mode. Therefore, a person who confirms the payout rate can easily and immediately check the pachinko game machine 1 by grasping that the special LED 350 is in a flashing mode, rather than confirming the payout rate with the payout rate indicator 300. It is possible to determine (confirm the abnormal output rate) that there is an unauthorized modification or failure in the product. In addition, by seeing that the special LED 350 is lit up, it is possible to easily and immediately judge that the pachinko game machine 1 has not been illegally remodeled or malfunctioned as a result of convergence of the output rate to some extent. is. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the output rate has not yet converged. Other effects of the sixth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modified Example of Sixth Mode>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. In the sixth form, whether the output rate is within the normal range (the character ratio does not exceed 70% and the continuous character ratio does not exceed 60%) is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350. I made it On the other hand, in the modification of the sixth form, whether the base is within the normal range is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 .

Here, the case where the base is within the normal range will be described. In the modification of the sixth form, the normal base is within the normal range if the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less. If the time reduction base is 84% or more and 99% or less, the time reduction base is within the normal range. Also, if the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less, the jackpot base is within the normal range. If all of the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base are within the normal range, the base is determined to be within the normal range. On the other hand, if any one of the normal base, the time saving base and the jackpot base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the base is determined to be out of the normal range.

In addition, in the modification of the sixth form, when the base (normal base, time-saving base, jackpot base) is displayed, the total number of shots fired from the time the power is turned on to the present time is less than 100,000, and the power is turned on If the number of times the special symbols have been varied and displayed up to the present time is less than 3000 times, the mode of the special LED is turned off. This allows a person who sees the special LED 350 in the extinguished state to understand that there is a possibility that the base has not yet converged.

Also, when the base is displayed, if the total number of balls fired is 100000 or more or the number of variations is 3000 or more and the base is within the normal range, the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode can understand that the pachinko game machine 1 has not been illegally remodeled or broken as a result of the convergence of the base to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, and the base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the flashing mode is made to know that the pachinko game machine 1 is illegally remodeled or broken down as a result of convergence to some extent.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 97, steps S2308, S2309, and S2341 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. ing. As shown in FIG. 97, the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or if the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game RAM 84 It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). If these data are set (YES in S2308), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES at S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S2302), after executing the base display process (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73), Special LED processing, which will be described later, is executed (S2341).

[Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 98, in the special LED processing (S2341), the total number of shot balls (the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time-saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state ) is 100,000 or more (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the time reduction shot ball number counter value and the jackpot shot ball number counter value is equal to or greater than "1000". If it is less than "100000" (NO in S2710), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is "3000" or more (S2711). If it is less than "3000" (NO at S2711), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2715), and this process ends. Thus, when the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the total number of balls fired is "100000" or more (YES at S2710) or the number of fluctuations is "3000" or more (YES at S2711), whether or not the base is within the normal range. (S2712). In other words, the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the time saving base is 84% or more and 99% or less, and the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less. It is determined whether any of the conditions are satisfied. If the base is within the normal range (YES in S2712), lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2713), and this process ends. Thus, on the condition that the base is a value that converges to some extent, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting mode when the base is within the normal range.

On the other hand, if the base is not within the normal range (NO in S2712), blinking mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2714), and this process ends. Thus, provided that the base is a value that has converged to some extent, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes a blinking mode when the base is outside the normal range.

As described above, according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, when the base moves from within the normal range to outside the normal range, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base, by grasping that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode, can easily and immediately make an illegal action on the pachinko game machine 1 than when confirming the base with the base display 300. It is possible to judge (confirm the abnormality of the base) that modification, failure, etc. have occurred. In addition, by seeing that the special LED 350 is lit up, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the pachinko game machine 1 has not been illegally remodeled or broken as a result of convergence of the base to some extent. be. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the base has not yet converged. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described sixth embodiment, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Seventh form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the seventh mode will be explained based on FIGS. 99 to 104. FIG. In the sixth form described above, after calculating the payout rate, it is notified whether or not the calculated payout rate (character product ratio or continuous role product ratio) exceeds a specified value (70% or 60%). On the other hand, in the seventh mode, it is notified whether or not the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value without calculating the output rate. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the seventh embodiment, special LEDs (informing means, abnormality informing means, light-emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 in the same manner as in the above-described sixth form. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the mode of the special LED 350 to the light-off mode shown in FIG. 99(A), the lighting mode (first mode) shown in FIG. 99(B), and the flashing mode shown in FIG. mode (second mode). In addition, in the seventh form, the payout rate indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the payout rate display process (S2304). Therefore, the drive circuit of the seventh form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86).

Here, a method for determining whether or not the output rate exceeds the specified value (is within the normal range) without calculating the output rate will be described. For example, when the total number of prize balls is 10000 (the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter is "100"), the fact that the role ratio exceeds 70% means that the number of prize balls is It is a situation that exceeds 7000 rounds. Further, for example, when the total number of prize balls is 15,000, the character ratio exceeds 70%, which means that the number of prize balls exceeds 10,500. In this way, when the total number of prize balls is the predetermined determined total number of prize balls (10000 shots, 15000 shots described above), the number of prize balls is the reference abnormal value (7000 shots, 10500 shots described above). ), it can be determined whether or not the role product ratio exceeds 70% at that time. Utilizing this point, in the seventh form, it is determined whether or not the role product ratio substantially exceeds 70% only by judging the size at a certain timing without calculating the role product ratio sequentially. In the above description, the role product ratio is explained as an example, but the continuous role product ratio is the same, so the explanation is omitted.

Thus, in the seventh form, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 . As shown in FIG. 100, the simple abnormality determination table determines the value of the total number of prize balls (determined total number of prize balls) at the judgment timing and whether the character ratio exceeds 70% at the judgment timing. and the value of the number of consecutive role prize balls (abnormal judgment value) for judging whether the continuous role ratio exceeds 60% at the judgment timing (abnormal judgment value).

With reference to this simple abnormality determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the total number of prize balls has reached the determined total number of prize balls. Then, if the determination total number of prize balls has been reached, it is further determined whether the number of prize balls exceeds the standard abnormal value or whether the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the standard abnormal value. It's like As a result, if the standard abnormal value is exceeded, the output rate (character ratio, continuous character ratio) exceeds the specified value (70%, 60%), and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. do. On the other hand, if the standard abnormal value is not exceeded, the output rate does not exceed the specified value, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. Note that in the seventh mode, the mode of the special LED 350 is turned off until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000 times, assuming that the output rate value has not substantially converged yet.

[Input Process] In the output process (S101) of the seventh form shown in FIG. 101, step S127 is provided instead of steps S115 to S121 of the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the winning balls counter addition process in step S114, and then executes the simple abnormality determination process (S127).

[Simple Abnormality Judgment Processing] As shown in FIG. 102, in the simple abnormality judgment processing (S127), first, the simple abnormality judgment table shown in FIG. 100 is referred to (S130). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current total number of prize balls has reached the judgment total number of prize balls (10,000 shots, 15,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 25,000 shots, etc.) (S131). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total winning ball counter (see FIG. 11(C)) is 100, 150, 200, 250, . If the determined total number of awarded balls has not been reached (NO in S131), this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the determined total number of prize balls has been reached (YES in S131), it is determined whether or not the current number of prize balls exceeds the reference abnormal value corresponding to the determined total number of prize balls (S132 ). For example, when the value of the actual prize ball number counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter exceeds "7000". If it exceeds (YES at S132), the abnormality flag is turned ON (S133), and this processing is finished. The abnormality flag substantially indicates that the output rate exceeds a specified value.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls does not exceed the reference abnormal value (NO in S132), then whether the number of consecutive prize balls at the present time exceeds the reference abnormal value corresponding to the total number of judgment balls It is determined whether or not (S134). For example, when the value of the actual total award ball number counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive prize ball number counter exceeds "6000". If it exceeds (YES at S134), the abnormality flag is turned ON (S133), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not exceeded (NO in S134), the abnormality flag is turned OFF (S135), and this processing is finished.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the seventh mode shown in FIG. 103, step S2320 is provided instead of steps S2304 and S2310 of the output processing (S107) of the sixth mode shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special LED processing when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302). (S2330).

[Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 104, in the special LED processing (S2330), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (the number of variations is 3000 or more). (S2720). If it is "3000" or more (YES at S2720), it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag is ON (S2721). If the abnormality flag is ON (YES in S2721), it means that the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value. Finish this processing. On the other hand, if the abnormality flag is not ON (NO in S2721), it means that the output rate does not substantially exceed the specified value, so the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2723 ), ending the process. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2720), it is assumed that the value of the output rate has not yet converged, and the light-off mode data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84. Set (S2724) and finish this process.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when the character ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 blinks from the lighting mode or the extinguishing mode. mode. Therefore, a person who confirms the output rate can understand that the special LED 350 is in a flashing mode, and that the pachinko game machine 1 has a failure or malfunction, or that it has been illegally remodeled. can be visually determined immediately.

In particular, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality in the payout rate by a simple method without calculating the payout rate. That is, since the above-described output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) is not executed, the division control process becomes unnecessary. Instead, when the total number of prize balls reaches the predetermined judgment total number of prize balls, the internal judgment is made whether the number of prize balls or the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the standard abnormal value. just go to As a result, it is possible for the game control microcomputer 81 to notify the abnormality of the payout rate while avoiding the complication of the processing and the increase of the processing load due to the division (calculation of the payout rate) in software.

And according to the pachinko game machine 1 of this 7th form, even if it does not report the payout rate as a numerical value, based on the idea that it is sufficient if the abnormality of a substantial payout rate can be notified by special LED350, it is shown in FIG. As shown, the output indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80 . In other words, in terms of hardware, only one special LED 350 is mainly added to the main control board 80 . Therefore, it is easy to solve the problem of securing space on the main control board 80, and it is possible to reduce the design change from the existing pachinko game machine and implement it at low cost. Other effects of the seventh embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the seventh form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, whether or not the yield substantially exceeds the prescribed value (whether it is within the normal range) is notified without calculating the yield. On the other hand, in the modification of the seventh form, it is notified whether or not the base is substantially within the normal range without calculating the base.

Also in the modification of the seventh embodiment, special LEDs (informing means, abnormality informing means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 (see FIG. 99), as in the above-described seventh form. The base display device 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the base display process (S2340). Therefore, the drive circuit of the modified example of the seventh form also has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86).

Here, a method for determining whether or not the base is outside the normal range (including whether or not it exceeds the upper limit of normal) without calculating the base will be described. For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000 (the value of the normal shot ball counter is "100"), the normal base is outside the normal range. The situation is that the total number of prize balls exceeds 3,900. Also, for example, when the number of balls fired in the time saving state is 2500 (the value of the time saving ball number counter is “25”), the fact that the time saving base is outside the normal range means that the total number in the time saving state It is a situation that the number of prize balls exceeds 2457 shots. Also, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state is 1000 (the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter is "10"), the fact that the jackpot base is outside the normal range means that the jackpot base is outside the normal range in the jackpot game state. It is a situation that the total number of prize balls exceeds 8000. In this way, the total number of prize balls when the number of shot balls in each game state is a predetermined determined number of shot balls (10000 shots, 2500 shots, 1000 shots, etc. described above) is the normal upper limit value (described above). 3900 shots, 2457 shots, 8000 shots, etc.), it is possible to judge whether each base is out of the normal range at that time. Utilizing this point, in the modified example of the seventh form, it is determined whether or not each base is substantially out of the normal range only by judging the magnitude at a certain timing without calculating each base sequentially.

In addition, in this modification of the seventh mode, it is not only checked whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value when the number of shot balls in each game state is the predetermined judgment number of shot balls, Whether or not it is smaller than the normal lower limit is also checked (see FIGS. 105A, 105B, and 105C). For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000, if the total number of prize balls in the normal game state is smaller than 3,000, it is judged to be out of the normal range. Further, for example, when the number of shot balls in the time saving state is 2500, if the total number of prize balls in the time saving state is smaller than 2100, it is determined to be out of the normal range. Also, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state is 1000, if the total number of prize balls in the jackpot game state is smaller than 6000, it is determined to be out of the normal range.

Thus, in the modification of the seventh form, the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 stores the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), the time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. ) and the jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(A), the normal simple abnormality determination table shows the value of the number of shot balls determined at the determination timing in the normal game state, and whether the normal base is within the normal range at the determination timing. It shows the value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for judging. Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the time-saving simple abnormality determination table determines whether the time-saving base is within the normal range at the determination timing and the value of the number of fired balls that becomes the determination timing in the time-saving state. It shows the value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for judging. Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the jackpot simple abnormality determination table includes the value of the number of shot balls to be determined at the determination timing in the jackpot gaming state, and whether the jackpot base is within the normal range at the determination timing. It shows the value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit, normal upper limit) for judging whether.

With reference to these simple abnormality determination tables, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of shot balls in each game state has reached the determination number of shot balls. Then, if the determination number of shot balls has been reached, it is determined whether or not the number exceeds the normal upper limit and whether or not the number is smaller than the normal lower limit. As a result, if it exceeds the normal upper limit value or is smaller than the normal lower limit value, the base is out of the normal range, and the special LED 350 changes to a blinking mode. On the other hand, if it is equal to or less than the normal upper limit value and equal to or more than the normal lower limit value, the base is within the normal range, and the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode. In the modification of the seventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000, it is assumed that the base value has not substantially converged, and the mode of the special LED 350 is turned off. do.

[Input Processing] In the output processing (S101) of the modification of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. Instead, step S191 is provided. As shown in FIG. 106, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the counter addition process (see FIG. 67) in step S151, and then executes the simple abnormality determination process (S191).

[Simple Abnormality Judgment Processing] As shown in FIG. 107, in the simple abnormality judgment processing (S191), first, a simple abnormality judgment table corresponding to the game state is referred to (S192). That is, in the normal game state, the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A) is referred to. Moreover, if it is a time saving state, the time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG.105(B) will be referred. Moreover, if it is a big-hit game state, the big-hit simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG.105(C) is referred. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of fired balls indicated in the referenced simple abnormality determination table has been reached (S193). For example, when referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A), it is determined whether the value of the normal shot ball counter is "100" (the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10000). judge. If it is not the determined number of shot balls (NO in S193), this processing is finished.

On the other hand, if the determined number of shot balls is determined (YES in S193), the total number of prize balls in the corresponding gaming state is equal to or less than the normal upper limit value shown in the simple abnormality determination table to be referred to, and is equal to or greater than the normal lower limit value. (S194). For example, referring to the normal/simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is 3000 or more. If the determination result of step S194 is NO, the abnormality flag is turned ON (S195), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S194 is YES, the abnormality flag is turned OFF (S196), and this processing is finished.

Note that the output process (S107) of the modified example of the seventh embodiment is the same as the output process (S107, see FIG. 103) of the seventh embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special LED processing (S2330) of the modification of the seventh embodiment is also the same as the special LED processing of the seventh embodiment (S2330, see FIG. 104), so description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the modification of the seventh embodiment, when the base is substantially out of the normal range, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode. Therefore, a person who checks the base can know that the pachinko game machine 1 has a failure or malfunction, or has been illegally modified by grasping that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode. It is possible to judge visually immediately. In particular, according to the modification of the seventh mode, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality of the base by a simple method without calculating the base. Therefore, for the game control microcomputer 81, it is possible to notify the abnormality of the base while avoiding the complication of the processing and the increase of the processing load due to the division (calculation of the base) in terms of software. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the above-described seventh embodiment, but are based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Eighth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the eighth form will be explained based on FIGS. 108 to 112. FIG. In the above-described first mode, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 performs the winning ball number counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) for measuring the total number of winning balls and the number of bonus balls activated, and A delivery rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) for calculating the delivery rate was executed. On the other hand, in the eighth form, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board (specific control board) 110 performs prize ball counter addition processing (S5104, see FIG. 112) and payout rate calculation processing (S5105, FIG. 112 reference) is to be executed. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the eighth form, when the main control board 80 inputs a winning detection signal, it outputs a winning ball command (winning information) to the payout control board 110 . As a result, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated based on the input prize ball command, and further calculates the payout rate. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs to the main control board 80 a payout rate calculation command including information on the calculated payout rate (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 based on the input payout rate calculation command.

As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 80 has a special memory 89 and the payout control board 110 has a payout special memory 189 . As described above, the special memory 89 retains its own memory contents even if the memory contents of the game RAM 84 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated with power on. . Also, the special payout memory 189 retains its own memory contents even if the memory contents of the RAM 119 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated along with the power-on. Note that the payout special memory 189 is a volatile memory means (DRAM), but may be composed of a non-volatile memory means (EEPROM, flash, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 109(B), the special memory 89 of the eighth form includes a variation number counter, a character product ratio storage area, a continuous character product ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area. Unlike the form special memory 89 (see FIG. 11(C)), it is not equipped with a 100-ball counter, actual total award ball number counter, award ball number counter, and consecutive award ball number counter. . Instead, as shown in FIG. 109(C), the payout special memory 189 of the eighth form includes a 100 ball counter, an actual total prize ball counter, a prize ball counter, a continuous prize ball counter, and a continuous prize ball counter. It is provided with a prize ball number counter. The ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 stores the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. An addition table may be stored.

[Input processing] In the input processing (S101) of the eighth form shown in FIG. is provided. As shown in FIG. 110, when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S123, based on the winning detection signal, it generates a prize ball command including information that can determine which winning hole the game ball has won, The prize ball command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. - 特許庁Conventionally, the prize ball command contained only information on the number of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by including information that can determine which winning slot has been won in the prize ball command, the payout control board 110 can determine the number of prize balls operated based on the entered prize ball command, as will be described later. can be measured. If it is possible to determine which winning slot the player has won substantially based on only the information on the number of prize balls, only the information on the number of prize balls may be included in the prize ball command as in the conventional case.

In the input process (S101), when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S140, it determines whether or not a payout rate calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If not received (NO at S140), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S140), the information on the character ratio included in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, and the value of the character ratio is stored in the character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S141). ). Subsequently, the information of the continuous role product ratio contained in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, the value of the continuous role product ratio is stored in the continuous role product ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S142), and this processing is finished. . Thus, in the eighth form, the output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 52 must satisfy the display conditions that the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and is in a customer waiting state (YES in S2302). If so, the output rate display process (S2304) is executed. At this time, as described above, the value of the role ratio stored in the role ratio storage area or the value of the continuous role ratio stored in the continuous role ratio storage area is displayed on the output rate display device 300. ing.

[Payment side timer interrupt process] The payout side timer interrupt process is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of several msec (for example, 4 msec) is input to the payout control board 110 . As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control microcomputer 116 first executes an input process which will be described later (S5001). Next, based on the information included in the prize ball command input from the main control board 80, a prize ball motor control process for driving the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball dispensing device 120 is executed (S5002). Next, based on the signal input from the card unit 135, a ball rental motor control process for driving the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball dispensing device 130 is executed (S5003). Subsequently, output processing is executed (S5004). In the output process (S5004), commands set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (delivery rate calculation command, etc.) are output to the main control board 80, and a signal for driving the firing motor 113 of the firing device 112 is sent to the firing control circuit. 111. Next, other processing is executed (S5005), and this processing ends.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 112, in the input processing (S5001), first, the payout control microcomputer 116 determines whether or not a prize ball command has been received. If not received (NO in S5101), proceed to step S5107. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S5101), the information included in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can determine which winning hole has won) is analyzed (S5102). Next, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, a prize ball number setting process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (S5103). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the prize ball number counter addition process similar to the prize ball number counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) described in the first mode is executed (S5104). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated. Next, based on the result of the number-of-balls counter addition process (S5104), a payout rate calculation process similar to the payout rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) described in the first mode is executed (S5105). That is, the payout control board 110 calculates the payout rate (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio). Then, the output rate calculation command including the calculated output rate information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5106), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not a prize ball detection signal has been received from the prize ball sensor 122. If it has been received (YES in S5107), a prize ball measurement process for measuring the number of prize balls actually paid out is executed (S5108). Next, it is determined whether or not a ball rental information signal has been received from the card unit 135 (S5109). If it has been received (YES in S5109), based on the information included in the rental ball information signal, the number of rental balls setting process for setting the number of rental balls to be rented is executed (S5110). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a ball rental detection signal has been received from the ball rental sensor 132 . If it has been received (YES in S5111), it executes a rented ball measurement process for measuring the number of actually rented balls (S5112). After that, other processes are executed (S5113), and this process ends.

As other processing (S5113), for example, if a RAM clear notification command is received from the main control board 80, the memory contents of the RAM 119 of the payout control board 110 are erased. However, even at this time, the value of the 100 ball counter provided in the payout special memory 189 of the payout control board 110, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the prize ball number counter, and the continuous role The prize ball counter value is not cleared. Therefore, in the eighth form, even if the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated by the role-playing goods and calculate the payout rate, the payout rate is calculated as a converged value as in the first form. It is possible to

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth form, it is possible to check the payout rate by displaying the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 . Furthermore, the payout control board 110, which is different from the main control board 80, measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls, continuous) based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 It is possible to measure the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate without imposing a processing burden of measurement on the main control board 80 . In particular, the payout control board 110 can measure the total number of prize balls by simply including information that can determine which winning slot the game ball has entered in the prize ball command transmitted from the conventional main control board 80. and measurement of the number of bonus balls activated. In other words, by adding information using the existing signal line for transmitting the prize ball command, there is no need to make the main control board 80 perform measurement processing, and the burden on the main control board 80 is reduced by a simple method. Is possible.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated with a role product, and also to calculate the payout rate. The main control board 80 can display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 based on the payout rate information included in the payout rate calculation command from the payout control board 110 . In this way, it is possible to display the payout rate without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculating the payout rate on the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Other effects of the eighth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the first embodiment described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

<First Modification of Eighth Mode>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the first modified example of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, in this first modification, the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110 . Then, as in the eighth form described above, the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is made to measure the total number of prize balls, measure the number of prize balls activated and calculate the payout rate. is also displayed. Specifically, the payout ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 can be executed in the output process (S5004) of the payout timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

In this first modified example, as shown in FIG. 114, since the output rate indicator is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is replaced with the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above. (See FIG. 86), it has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information. Also, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit 200G for causing the payout rate indicator 300 to display the payout rate. As shown in FIG. 115, the drive circuit 200G includes a lighting selection circuit section 230G and a lighting drive circuit section 240G, and is connected to the payout rate indicator 300 arranged on the payout control board 110. FIG. The lighting selection circuit section 230G has the same configuration as the above-described light emission selection circuit section 210 (see FIG. 15), and the lighting drive circuit section 240G has the same configuration as the above-described light emission drive circuit section 220 (see FIG. 15). , the description is omitted.

As described above, according to the first modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated with a role object, and also to calculate and display the payout rate. . Therefore, it is possible to display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation and display of the payout rate on the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). be. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the yield indicator 300 and the circuitry for displaying the yield on the main control board 80, the main control board can be implemented with almost no design changes. be.

In the eighth embodiment and its first modified example, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated with a role product, and also calculate the payout rate. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated with a role product, and does not calculate the payout rate. Instead, the payout control board 110 provides information on the total number of prize balls measured (the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter) and information on the number of bonus balls operated (the value of the counter for the number of prize balls and the continuous bonus balls). The value of the prize ball number counter) is output to the main control board 80 by the output processing of the payout side timer interrupt processing (S5004, see FIG. 111). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes payout rate calculation processing (S117, see FIG. 47) based on the command input from the payout control board 110 to calculate the payout rate. . Then, the calculated output rate may be displayed on the output rate indicator 300 on the main control board 80 by executing the output rate display process (S2304, see FIGS. 54 and 55). By doing so, it is possible to distribute the processing load of measurement and the processing load of calculation and display of the payout rate to the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80 .

<Second Modification of Eighth Mode>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the second modified example of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. In the eighth form and its first modification, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 is caused to count the measured values (the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls) for calculating the pay rate. On the other hand, in the second modification of the eighth form, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board 110 is caused to count the measurement values (total number of shot balls and total number of prize balls) for calculating the base. It's becoming In addition, in the second modification of the eighth form, the base display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 .

In this second modification, when the main control board 80 inputs a ball entry detection signal (including a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a), it outputs a prize ball command to the payout control board 110. FIG. However, when the main control board 80 receives a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a as the incoming ball detection signal, it outputs a prize ball command including information indicating that the number of prize balls is "0" to the payout control board 110. Thus, the payout control board 110 measures (counts) the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the input prize ball command, and further performs base calculation. And the payout control board 110 outputs to the main control board 80 a base calculation command including information on the calculated base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the base on the base display 300 based on the input base calculation command.

In this second modification, the main control board 80 has a special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 has a special payout memory 189 (see FIG. 108). As shown in FIG. 116(B), the special memory 89 of the second modification includes a normal base storage area, a short working hours base storage area, a jackpot base storage area, a variation counter, and a checksum storage area. . However, unlike the special memory of the modification of the first form (see FIG. 65(C)), there are a normal 100 ball counter, a normal shot ball counter, a normal total award ball counter, and a time saving 100 ball counter. , a time-saving shot ball number counter, a time-saving total award ball number counter, a counter for 100 jackpot balls, a jackpot shot ball number counter, and a jackpot total prize ball number counter are not provided. Instead, these counters are provided in a payout special memory 189 as shown in FIG. 116(C). The ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 stores the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 116(A). An addition table may be stored.

[Input processing] The input processing (S101) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modified example shown in FIG. 117, instead of steps S112, S113, S115, S116, S151, and S152 of the input process (S101) of the first modified example shown in FIG. S220 to S223 are provided. As shown in FIG. 117, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the incoming ball detection signal has been received in step S150, it refers to the winning balls counter addition table shown in FIG. 116(A) (S220). Then, based on the received ball entry detection signal and the prize ball number counter addition table, a prize ball command including information capable of determining which ball entrance the game ball has entered is generated, and the prize ball command is generated. is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84 (S221). At this time, for example, if a detection signal (entering ball detection signal) by the outlet sensor 16a is received, the ball entered by the outlet 16 and the prize ball are determined based on the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 116(A). A prize ball command including information that the number is "0" is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. - 特許庁As described in the eighth form above, the prize ball command may include only information on the number of prize balls.

When proceeding to step S222 in the input process (S101), it is determined whether or not the base calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If not received (NO in S222), this process ends. On the other hand, if received (YES in S222), the base information contained in the base calculation command is analyzed, the base value is stored in the corresponding storage area of the special memory 89 (S223), and this processing ends. . That is, if the base calculation command includes information on the normal base, the value of the normal base is stored in the normal base storage area, and if the information on the time saving base is included in the base calculation command, the time saving base is stored. The value is stored in the time saving base storage area, and if the base calculation command includes information on the jackpot base, the value of the jackpot base is stored in the jackpot base storage area. Thus, in the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the output processing (S107) shown in FIG. is established, base display processing (S2340) is executed. At this time, as described in the modification of the first form, the normal base value stored in the normal base storage area, the time reduction base value stored in the time reduction base storage area, or the jackpot base stored in the jackpot base storage area A value is displayed on the base display 300 .

[Input Processing] The input processing (S5001) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modification shown in FIG. 118, steps S5201 to S5206 are provided instead of steps S5101 to S5106 of the input process (S5101) of the eighth form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 118, in the input process (S5001), first, the payout control microcomputer 116 determines whether or not a prize ball command has been received. If not received (NO in S5201), proceed to step S5107. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S5201), the information included in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can determine which ball entrance the ball entered) is analyzed (S5202) . Next, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the number of prize balls setting process for setting the number of prize balls is executed (S5203). At this time, for example, if the ball entering the outlet 16 is analyzed, the number of prize balls is set to "0" in the number of prize balls setting process (S5203). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the same counter addition processing (S151, see FIG. 67) described in the modification of the first embodiment is executed (S5204). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. Next, based on the result of the counter addition process (S5204), the same base calculation process as the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) described in the modified example of the first form is executed (S5205). In other words, the payout control board 110 performs the calculation of the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base). Then, a base calculation command including information on the calculated base is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5206), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

As described above, according to the second modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 different from the main control board 80 measures the total number of shot balls and the total prize based on the winning ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to display the base without imposing a processing burden of measurement on the main control board 80 . In particular, the total number of shot balls can be set to the payout control board 110 by simply including information that can determine which ball entrance the game ball has entered in the prize ball command transmitted by the main control board 80 conventionally. and the total number of winning balls.

Further, according to the second modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, as well as perform base calculation. The main control board 80 can display the base on the base indicator 300 based on the base information included in the base calculation command from the payout control board 110 . In this way, it is possible to display the base without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation of the base on the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). As for other operational effects of the second modified example, the operational effects of the above-described eighth embodiment are merely changed based on the output rate, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third Modification of Eighth Mode>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the 3rd modification of the 8th form is demonstrated. In this third modification, the base indicator 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110 (see FIG. 113). Then, as in the second modification of the eighth form described above, the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is made to measure the total number of shot balls, measure the total number of prize balls, and calculate the base. The display of the base is also performed. Specifically, the base display process (S2340) shown in FIGS. 70 to 73 can be executed in the output process (S5004) of the payout side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

In this third modified example, since the base display is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is similar to the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above (see FIG. 86). , has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information. Also, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit for causing the base indicator 300 to display the base. This drive circuit is connected to the base display 300 arranged on the payout control board 110, and has almost the same configuration as the drive circuit 200F shown in FIG. 86, so the description is omitted.

As described above, according to the third modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of fired balls and the total number of prized balls, and also to calculate and display the base. Therefore, it is possible to display the base on the base display 300 without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation and display of the base on the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). Since it is not necessary to provide the base indicator 300 and the circuit section for displaying the base on the main control board 80, the main control board can be implemented with almost no design changes.

In addition, in the second and third modifications of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to calculate the base. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and to measure the total number of prize balls, and does not carry out calculation of the base. Instead, the payout control board 110 provides information on the total number of shot balls measured (the sum of the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the value of the short-time shot ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot shot ball number counter) and the total number of prize balls. information (the sum of the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the value of the time-saving total prize ball counter, and the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter), the output processing of the payout side timer interrupt process (S5004, Figure 111) to output to the main control board 80. Thereby, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) based on the command input from the payout control board 110 to calculate the base. Then, the calculated base may be displayed on the base display 300 on the main control board 80 by executing the base display processing (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73). In this way, it is possible to distribute the processing load of measurement and the processing load of base calculation and display to payout control board 110 and main control board 80 .

<Ninth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the ninth form will be described based on FIGS. 119 to 122. FIG. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. I am trying to connect to 210A. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, the bus lines BL are connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC1, and the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7 are input respectively. Further, the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1 are connected to the input terminals IN to IN4 of IC2 via four signal transmission lines S1, respectively, as in the first embodiment described above. are connected to input terminals IN5 to IN8 of IC2 via four signal transmission lines S4. Each common signal line (each lighting common line) B1 to B4 of the output indicator 300 is connected to the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2. The first common signal line B1 connected to the output terminal O5 of IC2 corresponds to the "first lighting common line", and the second common signal line B2 connected to the output terminal O6 of IC2 corresponds to the "second lighting Equivalent to "common line".

Thus, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form, the input terminals 5D to 8D and output terminals 5Q to 8Q of IC1 in the light emission selection circuit section 210 of the first form, and the input terminals IN5 to IN8 and output terminals O5 to O8 of IC2 are connected. I plan to put it to good use. As a result, the light emission selection circuit section 210A of the ninth form can select a light emission region that can be lighted out of the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and the four lighting regions 310 to 310 of the output indicator 300 A lighting region that can be lit from among the 340 can be selected.

[Game Display Processing] In the ninth form of game display processing (S2303) shown in FIG. , S2442, S2443, and S2444 are provided. As shown in FIG. 120, after executing step S2403, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[10000000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2441). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2405). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410 . After executing step S2411, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[01000000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2442). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2413). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light-emitting region 420 .

After executing step S2419, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00100000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2443). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2421). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light-emitting region 430 . After executing step S2426, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00010000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2444). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2428). As a result, the light-emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light-emitting region 440 .

[Performance Display Processing] In the performance display processing (S2304) of the ninth form shown in FIG. , steps S2550, S2551, S2552, and S2553 are provided. As shown in FIG. 121, after executing step S2503, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00001000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2550). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2551). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the first lighting region 310 . After executing step S2513, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000100] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2552). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2553). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the second lighting region 320 .

In the ninth form of the yield display process (S2304) shown in FIG. S2556 and S2557 are provided. As shown in FIG. 122, after executing step S2523, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2554). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2555). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the third lighting region 330 . After executing step S2532, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000001] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2556). Then, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2557). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit becomes the fourth lighting region 340 .

In this ninth form, data information D[10000000], data information D[01000000], data information D[00100000], and data information D[00010000] output by the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A are 1 signal. The data information D [00001000], the data information D [00000100], the data information D [00000010], and the data information D [00000001] output by the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit section 210A correspond to the second signal. . A state in which a light-emitting region capable of emitting light is selected by the first signal corresponds to a game display state. A state in which a lighting region that can be lit by the second signal is selected corresponds to the output rate display state (specific display state).

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the ninth form, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the first signal to the light emission selection circuit section 210A (IC1) by the drive circuit 200A shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to display game information relating to the progress of the game on the game display 40 . On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the second signal to the light emission selection circuit section 210A, the payout rate display state is entered, and the payout rate can be displayed on the payout rate display device 300. FIG. In this way, while utilizing the existing light emission selection circuit section (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit section (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display device 40, software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 , it is possible to alternatively display the game information and the display of the odds of winning. In other words, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the lighting selection circuit section 210X and the lighting driving circuit section 220X for displaying the output rate are not newly added, and the output rate indicator 300 can be provided with a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the output rate. In short, since there is no IC to be newly added to the existing drive circuit, the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form can be easily mounted on the main control board 80. FIG. Other operational effects of the ninth embodiment are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the ninth form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the ninth form will be described. In the ninth form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with a drive circuit 200A (see FIG. 119) to display the yield on the yield indicator 300. FIG. On the other hand, in the modification of the ninth embodiment, the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with a drive circuit 200A, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. FIG. The effect of the modified example in this case is the same as that of the above-described ninth embodiment, except that the output rate is used as a base, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Tenth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the tenth form will be explained based on FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, as shown in FIG. They are branched from each of the common signal lines A 1 to A 4 between the selection circuit section 210 . The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emission common line) A1 corresponds to the "first branched common line", and the second common signal line (second light emission common line) A2 The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to a "second branched common line". In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, the light emission selection circuit section 210 can select the light emission region that can be lighted from the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and the four lighting regions of the output indicator 300. A lighting area that can be lit from among 310 to 340 can be selected. However, the signals (common signals) output from the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC2 are transmitted to the light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40 via the common signal lines A1 to A4, and the common signals The information is transmitted to the lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300 via lines B1 to B4. Therefore, the lighting region is selected at the same time as the light emitting region is selected, and the light emitting region is also selected at the same time as the lighting region is selected.

As in the first embodiment, the data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output indicator 300 are branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah between the connector CN2 and the light emission driving circuit section 220. . Therefore, when game information is displayed on the game display device 40, the lighting mode of the game display device 40 is reflected as it is on the payout rate display device 300, and when the payout rate is displayed on the payout rate display device 300, The lighting mode of the output indicator 300 is directly reflected on the game indicator 40. - 特許庁

[Performance Display Processing] In the tenth form of performance display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. S2561 is provided. As shown in FIG. 124, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2560). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the first lighting region 310, and the first light emitting region 410 is also selected. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S2561). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the second lighting region 320, and the second light emitting region 420 is also selected.

In the tenth form of the yield display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 125, steps S2562 and S2563 are provided instead of the steps S2525 and S2534 of the first form of the yield display process (S2304) shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 125, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2562). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the third lighting region 330, and the third light emitting region 430 is also selected. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S2563). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the fourth lighting region 340, and the fourth light emitting region 440 is also selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the tenth form, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. It is possible to display game information relating to the progress of the game on the game display 40 . Also, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the payout ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. It is possible to

According to the drive circuit 200B of the tenth embodiment, similar to the above-described ninth embodiment, the existing light emission selection circuit units (IC1, IC2) and the light emission drive circuit units (IC3, IC3, While using IC4), it is possible to alternatively display the game information and the output rate by switching the control output by the game control microcomputer 81 in a software manner. In other words, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the lighting selection circuit section 210X and the lighting driving circuit section 220X for displaying the output rate are not newly added, and the output rate indicator 300 can be provided with a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the output rate.

Here, in the tenth form, as described above, the light emission mode when game information is displayed on the game display device 40 is reflected on the pay rate display device 300, and the lighting mode when the pay rate is displayed on the pay rate display device 300. is reflected on the game display 40, but this is not a problem. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the payout rate on the payout rate display device 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. Therefore, during the game by the player, the game information is displayed on the game display 40 because the game machine frame 50 is normally closed. At this time, even if the lighting mode of the game display 40 is reflected in the payout rate indicator 300, the payout rate indicator 300 cannot be visually recognized, so there is no problem. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 50 is opened to check the output rate, the customer waiting state is set. At this time, there is no problem even if the lighting mode of the output rate indicator 300 is reflected in the game indicator 40 because the game is not being played. Other operational effects of the tenth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the first embodiment described above, so descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Modification of the tenth form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the tenth form will be described. In the tenth form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200B (see FIG. 123), and the yield indicator 300 displays the yield. On the other hand, in the modification of the tenth embodiment, the driving circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with the driving circuit 200B, and the base is displayed on the base indicator 300. FIG. In this case, the effects of the modified example are the same as those of the tenth embodiment described above, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Eleventh form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the eleventh form will be explained based on FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. In the drive circuit 200 of the first form, as shown in FIG. It branches off from Ah. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, as shown in FIG. It is connected to the circuit section 240 . Note that in the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh embodiment, the lighting drive circuit section 240 is provided instead of the lighting selection circuit section 230 of the first embodiment. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, as shown in FIG. It is provided by branching from Therefore, the light emission selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emission region that can be lighted from the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and can light up from the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300. The lighting area can be selected. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emission common line) A1 corresponds to the "first branched common line", and the second common signal line (second light emission common line) A2 The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to a "second branched common line".

The lighting drive circuit unit 240 controls the eight output ratio lighting units in the lighting region selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 out of the four lighting regions 310 to 340 based on the data information D[0...7]. It is a circuit for enabling lighting. The lighting drive circuit section 240 is configured with a flip-flop (IC7) and a transistor array (IC8).

IC 7 is a D-type flip-flop similar to IC 3 of the light emission drive circuit section 220 . A bus line BL is connected to input terminals 1D to 8D of IC 7, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6 and D7 are inputted respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC7, respectively. A reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC7. A select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC7.

IC8 is a driver similar to IC4 of the light emission drive circuit section 220 . Eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC8. On the other hand, the data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh are connected to the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC8. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are connected to the eight output lighting units (see FIG. 13) of the lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300 via current limiting resistors RC.

[Performance display processing] In the performance display processing of the eleventh form (S2304) shown in Fig. 127, steps S2503, S2505, S2509, S2513, S2515, Instead of S2519, steps S2570, S2571, S2572, S2573, S2574 and S2575 are provided. As shown in FIG. 127, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . . . 7]=D[0 . The level is switched to "H" level (S2570). As a result, the lighting state of the fourth lighting region 340 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Then, in step S2504, after the data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2571). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the first lighting region 310, and the first light emitting region 410 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2572). As a result, the tens place of the output rate (character product ratio or continuous character product ratio) is displayed in the selected first lighting region 310, and the lighting mode in the first lighting region 310 is displayed in the selected first light emitting region 410. is not reflected.

Also, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2512, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to "H" level. (S2573). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 in the previous time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Then, in step S2514, after the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2574). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the second lighting region 320, and the second light emitting region 420 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after step S2517 or S2518 is executed, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2575). Accordingly, the ones digit of the output rate is displayed in the selected second lighting region 320, and the lighting mode in the second lighting region 320 is not reflected in the selected second light emitting region 420. - 特許庁

In the eleventh mode of output rate display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. S2576, S2577, S2578, S2579, S2580, S2581 are provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . The level is switched to "H" level (S2576). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Then, in step S2524, after the data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2577). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the third lighting region 330, and the third light emitting region 430 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after step S2527 or S2528 is executed, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2578). Accordingly, "1" or "2" is displayed in the selected third lighting region 330, and the lighting mode of the third lighting region 330 is not reflected in the selected third light emitting region 430.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 . . . 7]=D [0 . (S2579). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 last time (4 ms ago) is not reflected. Then, in step S2533, after outputting data information D[0 . . . 3]=D[0001] from input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of select signal XCSE0 is switched to "H" level (S2580). As a result, the lighting region that can be lit is selected as the fourth lighting region 340, and the fourth light emitting region 440 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2536 or S2537, the output level of select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" level (S2581). Accordingly, "0" or "1" is displayed in the selected fourth lighting region 340, and the lighting mode of the fourth lighting region 340 is not reflected in the selected fourth light emitting region 440.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. Is possible. Also, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the payout ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. According to the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, for the existing light emission selection circuit section 210 (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit section 220 (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display device 40, It is possible to configure only by adding the lighting drive circuit section 240 (IC7, IC8). That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, there is no need to newly add both the lighting selection circuit section 210X and the lighting drive circuit section 220X for displaying the output rate. Thus, according to the eleventh form, by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 and adding the lighting drive circuit unit 240, the display of the game information and the display of the payout rate can be selected with a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to do it all at once. Other effects of the eleventh embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the eleventh form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the eleventh form will be described. In the eleventh form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with a drive circuit 200C (see FIG. 126) to display the yield on the yield indicator 300. FIG. On the other hand, in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, the driving circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with a driving circuit 200C, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. FIG. The effect of the modified example in this case is the same as that of the above-described eleventh embodiment, but is only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Twelfth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the twelfth form will be explained based on FIGS. 129 to 133. FIG. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the lighting selection circuit section 230 is configured with IC5 (flip-flop) and IC6 (transistor array) as integrated circuits. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth form, as shown in FIG. 129, the lighting selection circuit section 250 is configured with only the IC6 as an integrated circuit. In the following, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

A signal transmission line S11 branched from the signal transmission line S1 connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1 and the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of IC2 is provided. The signal transmission line S11 is connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6. Therefore, IC2 can transmit signals to the common signal lines A1 to A4 of the game display 40 based on the signals output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1, and IC6 is also output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1. A signal can be transmitted to the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the game display 40 based on the received signal. However, in this case, if the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 are always in a conducting state, the light emission mode when game information is displayed on the game display 40, as in the tenth form described above (see FIG. 123). is reflected on the payout rate indicator 300, and the lighting mode when the payout rate is displayed on the payout rate indicator 300 is reflected on the game display device 40. - 特許庁Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the switch circuit section 260 is provided in the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 in order to deal with the above problem.

The switch circuit section 260 can switch the signal transmission line S1 between the conducting state and the non-conducting state, and can switch the signal transmission line S11 between the conducting state and the non-conducting state. The switch circuit section 260 switches the signal transmission line (second signal line) S11 to the non-conducting state when the signal transmission line (first signal line) S1 is switched to the conducting state. When switching to the non-conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is switched to the conducting state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit section 260 includes a first switch section 261 on the signal transmission line S1 and a second switch section 262 on the signal transmission line S11. The first switch unit 261 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR1) and a P-type MOSFET (TR11) for switching the connection state (connected or disconnected) between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC2. , an N-type MOSFET (TR2) and a P-type MOSFET (TR12) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 2Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN2 of IC2, and the connection state between the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC2. and an N-type MOSFET (TR4) and a P-type MOSFET (TR14 ), a first inverter INV1, and a second inverter INV2.

The second switch unit 262 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR5) and a P-type MOSFET (TR15) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC6, and a switch between the output terminal 2Q of IC1 and IC6. An N-type MOSFET (TR6) and a P-type MOSFET (TR16) for switching the state of connection with the input terminal IN2, and an N-type MOSFET (TR7) for switching the state of connection between the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC6. and a P-type MOSFET (TR17), an N-type MOSFET (TR8) and a P-type MOSFET (TR18) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC6, and a third inverter INV3. I have.

Specifically, in the first switch section 261 and the second switch section 262, the drain terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR8) TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, and TR18) are connected, and a pull-up resistor Ra is connected to this side. On the other side, the source terminal of the N-type MOSFET and the drain terminal of the P-type MOSFET are connected.

In the first switch section 261, the level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 twice by the first inverter INV1 and the second inverter INV2 is applied to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4). A signal is input. In the first switch section 261, a signal having a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the first inverter INV1 is input to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14). .

In the second switch section 262, a signal having a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the third inverter INV3 is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). . Further, in the second switch section 262, the select signal XCSE10 is input at the same level to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18).

In this way, in the first switch section 261 and the second switch section 262, the "H" level signal is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). (That is, as the gate voltage (gate-source voltage) becomes "L" level (voltage higher than the upper threshold voltage)), P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18 ) (that is, when the gate voltage becomes “L” level (voltage lower than the lower threshold voltage)), a sufficient current flows between the drain and source of each MOSFET. becomes flowing. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

Conversely, when an "L" level signal is input to the gate terminal of the N-type MOSFET (that is, the gate voltage becomes "L" level), an "H" level signal is applied to the gate terminal of the P-type MOSFET. When a signal is input (that is, when the gate voltage becomes "H" level), a sufficient current does not flow between the drain and source of each MOSFET. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conducting.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to "H" level (first level), the first switch unit 261 uses N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3 , TR4) are input with "H" level signals, and P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14) are input with "L" level signals, so that the signal transmission line S1 is turned on. Become. Also, at this time, in the second switch section 262, an "L" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) are input. , the signal transmission line S11 is rendered non-conductive.

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to "L" level (second level), the first switch section 261 uses N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4 ) is input to P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14), and an "H" level signal is input to P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14). . Also, at this time, in the second switch section 262, an "H" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) are input. , the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

Thus, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth form, the switch circuit section 260 is configured by a combination of two MOSFETs of different types. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of communication between the game control microcomputer 81 and IC2 and IC6. That is, since the switch circuit section 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs, switching operation is possible in the range from 0V to Vcc. Therefore, it is easier to set the input voltages to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of IC2 and IC6 to a level for normal operation, compared to the case where the switch circuit section is composed of only one of P-type and N-type MOSFETs. Is possible.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 131, steps S2306 and S2307 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 131, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO at S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the select signal XCSE10 at the output level to "H" level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes conductive, while the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive. Then, game display processing is executed to display game information on the game display 40 (S2303). On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to " L” level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes non-conductive, while the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive. Then, a payout rate display process is executed to display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 (S2304).

[Performance display processing] In the performance display processing of the twelfth form (S2304) shown in FIG. S2591 is provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2590). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the first lighting region 310, and the first light emitting region 410 is not selected. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S2591). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the second lighting region 320, and the second light emitting region 420 is not selected.

In the twelfth form of the yield display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 133, steps S2592 and S2593 are provided instead of steps S2525 and S2534 of the first form of the yield display process (S2304) shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 133, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2592). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the third lighting region 330, and the third light emitting region 430 is not selected. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S2593). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the fourth lighting region 340, and the fourth light emitting region 440 is not selected.

The game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is the same as the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. However, when executing the game display process of the twelfth form (S2303), as described above, although the signal transmission line S1 is in the conducting state, the signal transmission line S11 is in the non-conducting state. Contrary to (S2304), the lighting regions 310 to 340 are not selected while the light emitting regions 410 to 440 are selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the twelfth form, as shown in FIG. 129, the switch circuit section 260 is provided in the driving circuit 200D. As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to "H" level or "L" level, whereby the game display state or the lighting state in which the light emission selection circuit unit 210 selects the light emission area that can be lighted is displayed. It is possible to switch to an output rate display state in which the selection circuit section 250 selects a lighting area that can be lit. In other words, the switch circuit section 260 enables the display on the game display 40 and the display on the payout rate display 300 to be performed alternatively. It is possible to avoid reflecting the lighting mode on the pay rate indicator 300 or reflecting the lighting mode of the pay rate indicator 300 on the game indicator 40 . Other effects of the twelfth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the twelfth form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the twelfth form will be described. In the twelfth form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with a drive circuit 200D (see FIG. 129) including the switch circuit section 260 (see FIG. 130), and the output rate indicator 300 is used. The rate is now displayed. On the other hand, in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the driving circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with a driving circuit 200D including the switch circuit section 260, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. It is The effect of the modified example in this case is that the effect of the above-described twelfth embodiment is changed only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Thirteenth form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the thirteenth form will be described based on FIGS. 134 to 137. FIG. In the first embodiment, the yield indicator 300 is provided and the yield is displayed on the yield indicator 300 . On the other hand, in the thirteenth mode, the payout rate is displayed on the game display device 40F without providing the payout rate display device 300. FIG. In other words, the thirteenth mode is characterized in that it is possible to display the game information relating to the progress of the game as well as the payout rate with one display, the game display 40F. This game display 40F is arranged on the right side of the game board 2 (plate-shaped member of the game board 2), like the game display 40 of the first form (see FIG. 3). Therefore, when the payout rate is displayed on the game display 40F, it is possible to check the payout rate from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 134, in the game display 40F of the thirteenth form, the first light-emitting area 410F and the second light-emitting area 420F do not form the so-called 7 segments, and the first light emitting area 410F and the second light-emitting area 420F of the game display 40 of the first form. Similar to the light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area 420 (see FIG. 5), game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are arranged. This is to make it difficult to distinguish the type of the jackpot symbol in the light emitting mode of the first light emitting area 410F (the first special symbol display 41a) and the second light emitting area 420F (the second special symbol display 41b). . On the other hand, the third light-emitting region 430F and the fourth light-emitting region 440F are so-called 7 segments, similar to the third lighting region 330 and the fourth lighting region 340 of the output indicator 300 of the first type (Fig. 8), each of the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 and LA25 to LA32 are arranged. This is for the purpose of displaying the output rate (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) as a numerical value in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440 .

The drive circuit of the thirteenth form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86). In other words, unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first form, a new circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not added. Therefore, the existing drive circuit for displaying game information is used as it is to display the payout rate. In the thirteenth mode, as described above, the output rate is indicated by the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F of the game display 40F. The first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F indicates whether it is the role ratio or the continuous role ratio. 40F is indicated by a second light emitting region 420F.

However, as shown in FIG. 111, since the first light emitting region 410F and the second light emitting region 420F are not so-called 7 segments, numbers are not shown. Therefore, in the 111th form, if all the game light emitting parts LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410F are emitting light, the character ratio is indicated. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting parts LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410F do not emit light (if they are extinguished), the continuous character ratio is indicated. Also, if all the gaming light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second light emitting area 420F are emitting light, the output rate is indicated as an effective value. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second light emitting area 420F are not emitting light (if they are extinguished), the output rate is shown as a reference value.

[Performance display processing] In the performance display processing (S2304) of the thirteenth form shown in FIG. , steps S3001, S3002, S3003, and S3004 are provided. As shown in FIG. 135, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3001, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3001). As a result, the light-emitting region that can be lit (lighted) becomes the third light-emitting region 430F. After executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2509). As a result, the tens digit of the output rate (character product ratio or continuous character product ratio) is displayed in the third light emitting area 430F. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S3004). As a result, the light-emitting region that can be lit (light-emitted) becomes the fourth light-emitting region 440F. After executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2519). As a result, the ones digit of the output rate is displayed in the fourth light emitting region 440F.

In the thirteenth mode of yield display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. Instead, steps S3005, S3006, S3007, S3008, S3009, S3010, S3011 and S3012 are provided. As shown in FIG. 136, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3005, and then changes the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3006). As a result, the light-emitting region that can be lit (lighted) becomes the first light-emitting region 410F.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), the data information D[0...7]=D[1...1] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S3007), and the select signal XCSE1 to "H" level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting region 410F emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F is the character ratio. be On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S3008), The output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting parts LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410F do not emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F is the continuous character ratio. is shown.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0 . (S3010). As a result, the light-emitting region that can be lit (light-emitted) becomes the second light-emitting region 420F. Then, if the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is "100" or more (YES at S2535) or the value of the variation number counter is "3000" or more (YES at S2537), data information is sent from input/output terminals D0 to D7. D[0...7]=D[1...1] is output (S3011), and the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2539). As a result, all the gaming light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second light emitting region 420F emit light, indicating that the output rates displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F are valid values. . On the other hand, if the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is less than "100" (NO at S2535) and the value of the variation number counter is less than "3000" (NO at S2537), input/output terminal D0 7]=D[0 . . . 0] are output from D7 (S3012), and the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H" level (S2539). This indicates that all the gaming light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second light emitting region 420F do not emit light, and the output rates displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440 are reference values. be

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the thirteenth form, it is possible to display the payout rate using the game display 40F for displaying game information relating to the progress of the game. In other words, there is no need to newly provide a dedicated display or electric circuit (driving circuit) to display the pay rate, and only a software change to the game control microcomputer 81 is required. Therefore, it is possible to display the payout rate without almost changing the design of the existing pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In other words, it is possible to prevent a design change for displaying the output rate from requiring a great deal of cost and labor. Also, the game display 40F is arranged on the game board 2 instead of being arranged on the back side of the game machine frame 50 as in the above embodiments. Therefore, the payout percentage displayed on the game display 40F can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout percentage can be easily confirmed. Other operational effects of the thirteenth embodiment are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the thirteenth form>
A pachinko game machine 1 of a modified example of the thirteenth form will be described. In the thirteenth mode, the payout rate display device 300 for displaying the payout rate is not provided, and the payout rate is displayed on the game display 40F (see FIG. 134). On the other hand, in the modification of the thirteenth form, the base is displayed on the game display 40F without providing the base display 300 for displaying the base. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134, the base as a numerical value (normal base, short time base, jackpot base) is displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F of the game display 40F.

When the normal base is displayed, one game light-emitting portion LA1 is caused to emit light in the first light-emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. When displaying the time-saving base, the two game light emitting units LA1 and LA2 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. Also, when displaying a big hit base, the three game light emitting units LA1, LA2 and LA3 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. Furthermore, when displaying the base as the effective value, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 are caused to emit light in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display 40F. On the other hand, when displaying a base value as a reference value, none of the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 emit light in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display 40F (turns off). It should be noted that the light emission mode described above is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the effects of the modified example are the same as those of the thirteenth embodiment described above, but are only based on the output rate, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<14th form>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the 14th form will be described based on FIG. In the first mode, the display condition for displaying the payout rate on the payout rate display device 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the player is waiting for a customer. On the other hand, in the fourteenth form, the display condition is that the RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 has been operated and that the customer is waiting.

[Output Processing] In the fourteenth form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 137, step S2314 is provided instead of step S2301 of the first form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 137, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2314). The display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152 as described above. If the display flag is "1" (YES at S2314) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S2302), the output rate display process is executed (S2304). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO at S2314) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), game display processing is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is set to "1" in the initial setting, the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after power-on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 upon power-on. Therefore, at this time, game display processing (S2303) is performed.

The person who confirms the payout rate in this way waits for the state of waiting for a customer, opens the game machine frame 50, and then operates the RAM clear switch 152 to display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300.例文帳に追加It is possible. Even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated except when the power is turned on, the information stored in the game RAM 84 will not be cleared. In the fourteenth form, unlike the first form, the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 does not switch the display of the character ratio and the display of the continuous character ratio. The display of the character product ratio and the display of the continuous character product ratio are automatically switched at the same time.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourteenth form, it is possible to display the payout rate by operating the RAM clear switch 152 only when the payout rate is desired to be confirmed. By the way, the RAM clear switch 152 is normally operated only when the power is turned on. Therefore, according to the fourteenth form, considering that the design change will be large if the operation means for displaying the output rate is newly provided on the main control board 80 or other parts, the existing control unit that is not used after the power is turned on The RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily display the output rate while minimizing design changes. Other effects of the fourteenth embodiment are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

<Modified Example of Fourteenth Mode>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the modification of the fourteenth form will be described based on FIG. In the fourteenth mode, the display conditions for displaying the output rate on the output rate indicator 300 are that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and that the customer is waiting. On the other hand, in the modification of the fourteenth form, the display conditions for displaying the base on the base display 300 are that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and that the customer is waiting. .

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 138, in the output processing (S107) of the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, step S2301 of the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 69 is replaced with step S2350. is provided. As shown in FIG. 138, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2314). In the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, unlike the modification of the first embodiment described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152. FIG. If the display flag is "1" (YES at S2350) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S2302), base display processing is executed (S2340). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO at S2340) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO at S2302), game display processing is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is initially set to "1", the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on.

A person who confirms the base in this way waits for the state of waiting for a customer, opens the gaming machine frame 50, and then operates the RAM clear switch 152, so that the base can be displayed on the base display device 300. . In this modified example of the fourteenth form, unlike the modified example of the first form, by operating the RAM clear switch 152, the display of the normal base, the display of the time saving base, and the display of the jackpot base are not switched. , the normal-based display, the time-saving-based display, and the jackpot-based display are automatically switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute).

As described above, according to the modification of the fourteenth form, by operating the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to display the bass only when it is desired to check the bass. In particular, if the operation means for displaying the base is newly provided on the main control board 80 or other parts, the design change will be large. It is possible to arbitrarily display the base while minimizing design changes. The effects of the other modifications are the same as those of the fourteenth embodiment described above, but are only based on the output rate, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Other Modifications>
In each of the above embodiments and their modifications, the display condition for displaying the payout rate on the payout rate display device 300 or the display condition for displaying the base on the base display device 300 is open to the gaming machine frame 50. In addition, it is in a customer waiting state, or the RAM clear switch 152 is operated and in a customer waiting state. However, the display conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, only the opening of the game machine frame 50, only the customer waiting state, or only the operation of the RAM clear switch 152, or the display condition where the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer waiting state is displayed. and that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. Alternatively, a new switch (operating means) may be provided on the back side of the game machine frame 50, and the display condition may be that the switch is operated. Further, the display condition may be that a specific operation (for example, an operation in a certain setting screen) is performed with the effect button 63 or the select button 64 (operation means).

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, the light emission selection circuit units 210 and 210A are configured to include two integrated circuits (IC1 and IC2). However, the emission selection circuit section may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuits IC. Also, the light emission driving circuit section 220 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC3 and IC4). However, the light emission driving circuit section may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuits IC. Also, the lighting selection circuit section 230 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC5 and IC6), and the lighting selection circuit section 250 is configured to include one integrated circuit (IC6). However, the lighting selection circuit section may be configured to include three or more integrated circuits IC. Also, the lighting drive circuit section 240 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC7 and IC8). However, the lighting drive circuit section may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuits IC.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and modifications thereof, as the game display 40, the one in which the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 are arranged as shown in FIG. 5 is used. However, the game display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game display may have light-emitting units arranged as shown in FIG. Also, the game display may be a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display as shown in FIG. In this case, as described in the thirteenth mode, when displaying the payout rate on the game display (4-segment 7-segment), it is possible to indicate the payout rate and the base as numerical values.

In each of the above embodiments and modifications thereof, the game display 40 emits light corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 commons.times.8 (N=8) bits. However, for example, only the first light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region 420 may be provided, and light may be emitted corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 commons×8 bits. Alternatively, light may be emitted corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 commons×4 (N=4) bits, and the number of light emitting regions and the number of light emitting units capable of emitting light in each light emitting region (natural number N). can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, a so-called 4-segment 7-segment system is used as the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 as shown in FIG. However, the output rate indicator or base indicator 300 is not limited to the 4-segment 7-segment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the output rate indicator or the base indicator may be one in which each lighting section is arranged instead of each game light emitting section LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. Each lighting unit may be arranged instead of the . However, if the output rate display or base display is not of the 7-segment type shown in FIG. 5, the output rate or base cannot be indicated as a numerical value. In this case, for example, the number of lit portions lit in the first lighting region indicates the tens digit of the output rate or the base, and if eight lighting portions are blinking, the tens digit of the output rate or the base is indicated. Let it be "9". In addition, the number of lighting portions lit in the second lighting area indicates the ones digit of the output rate or the base, and if the eight lighting portions for the output rate are flashing, the ones digit of the output rate is "9". to be certain. In this way, only a person who checks the output rate or the base may understand the display (output rate, base) on the output rate indicator or the base indicator using a manual or the like.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modification, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator lights up corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 commons.times.8 (N=8) bits. However, for example, only the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 may be provided, and lighting may be performed corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 commons×8 bits. Alternatively, the lighting may correspond to a total of 16 bits of 4 commons×4 (N=4) bits, and the number of lighting regions and the number of lighting sections that can be lit in each lighting region (natural number N). can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, the number (8) of light emitting units provided in one light emitting area of the game display 40 and the number of light emitting units provided in one lighting area of the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 The number (8) of lighting units used was the same. However, the number of light-emitting sections provided in one light-emitting region may be different from the number of lighting sections provided in one lighting region. Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, the number (4) of light-emitting regions provided in the game display device 40 and the number (4) of lighting regions provided in the output rate display device 300 or the base display device 300 were the same. . However, the number of light emitting regions and the number of lighting regions may be different.

Further, in each of the above forms and its modifications, the output rate (character ratio or continuous character ratio) is displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the output rate indicator 300, and the base indicator 300 A base (a normal base, a time-saving base, or a jackpot base) is displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 . However, the lighting area for displaying the output rate or the base can be changed as appropriate. For example, the output rate or the base may be displayed in the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340 . Also, the output rate, normal base, or short working hours base is displayed in the tenth place and the one place as a percentage display. However, even if it is 60%, the decimal point may be displayed together, such as "0.60". Alternatively, the output rate, normal base, or short working hours base may be displayed as a percentage, and only the tens digit may be displayed. In this way, it is possible to display only one lighting area. In this case, it is preferable to round off to the nearest one. Alternatively, the character product ratio may be displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320, and the continuous character product ratio may be displayed in the third lighting region 330 and the fourth lighting region 340, or vice versa. You can do it. Also, for the jackpot base, the decimal point may be displayed together, or only the hundreds place may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described forms and modifications thereof, while the jackpot game can be executed, the pachinko game machine 1 does not execute the small winning game, so Fig. 11 (A), Fig. 65 (A), Fig. 109 (A) The total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls activated were measured using the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. However, in the case of a pachinko game machine capable of executing a small winning game, the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls activated may be measured using the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. That is, when the game ball wins the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 by executing the small winning game, the value of the 100-ball counter and the value of the accessory prize ball number counter are set to "15". However, it is sufficient not to increase the value of the consecutive prize ball number counter.

In each of the above embodiments, a counter for 100 balls and an actual total number of prize balls counter are used in order to measure the total number of prize balls, which is the denominator for calculating the output rate, as 1 per 100 balls. However, the total number of winning balls may be measured as one in units other than 100 balls, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Also, the total number of prize balls may be measured in units of one ball by using only one counter, the total number of prize balls. In this case, when calculating the role product ratio, the value of the total prize ball counter measured in units of one ball is divided by the value of the role product prize ball counter and multiplied by 100. When calculating the role ratio, the value of the total number of prize balls counted in units of one ball is divided by the value of the counter of the number of consecutive prize balls and multiplied by 100.

In addition, in the above modifications, a normal 100 ball counter and a normal ball counter are used in order to measure the number of balls fired, which is the denominator for calculating the normal base, as one in units of 100 balls. board. In addition, a time-saving 100-ball counter and a time-saving ball number counter were used in order to measure the number of balls fired, which is the denominator for calculating the time-saving base, as one in 100 balls. In addition, a counter for 100 jackpot balls and a counter for the number of hit balls fired were used to measure the number of shot balls, which is the denominator for calculating the jackpot base, as one in units of 100 balls. However, each number of shot balls may be counted as one in units other than 100 balls, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Also, the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time-saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state may be measured on a ball-by-ball basis using one counter. In this case, for example, when the normal base is calculated, the value of the counter measured in units of one ball is divided by the value of the counter for the number of normal total winning balls and multiplied by 100.

In addition, in the modification of each of the above forms, the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is calculated and displayed for each game state, that is, the normal game state, the time saving state, and the jackpot game state. However, the range of dividing the base can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the base other than the big winning game state and the base in the big winning game state may be calculated and displayed. Also, the base may be calculated and displayed in consideration of all the states from when the power is turned on to the present time, without dividing by the game state. Alternatively, a base limited to a specific state (for example, time saving state) may be calculated and displayed.

Also, in each of the above modes and modifications thereof, the total number of awarded balls and the total number of shot balls were measured from the time when the power was turned on for the first time (predetermined start time). However, the above-mentioned predetermined start time can be changed as appropriate. good.

Further, in the first form, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of variations is less than 3,000, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the output rate is a reference value. rice field. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls is 10000 or more or the number of variations is 3000 or more, "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the output rate is a valid value. However, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the output rate is not displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 (that is, the output rate as a reference value is not displayed). ), if the total number of prize balls is 10000 or more or the number of variations is 3000 or more, the output rate may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 . In this case, it is possible for the person who checks the output rate to judge the output rate as a value that has converged to some extent (the output rate as an effective value) on the condition that the output rate is displayed. be.

Further, in the above-described first form, if either the first condition that the total number of prize balls is 10000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied, the output rate is an effective value. showed that However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be indicated that the output rate is a valid value. Alternatively, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the output rate is a valid value. Then, when only the first condition is provided, if the first condition is satisfied, the output rate is displayed, but if the first condition is not satisfied, the output rate may not be displayed. Further, when only the second condition is provided, the output rate may be displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. Also, if the time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on for the first time is measured and the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the output rate is a valid value. may be shown. Further, it is also possible to indicate that the output rate is an effective value by a suitable combination of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

Further, in the above-described first form, in order to determine that the output rate is an effective value that converges to some extent, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10000 (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times ( A determination was made as to whether or not the rotation speed was equal to or greater than a predetermined number of revolutions. However, the value of the total number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. A determination may be made as to whether or not the number of revolutions is 10000 (predetermined number of revolutions) or more.

Further, in the above-described first form, "1" (a specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 in order to notify that the output rate is a valid value. However, the specific number for notifying that the value is valid is not limited to "1", but may be "7" and can be changed as appropriate. Also, it is not always necessary to display a number in order to notify that the output rate is a valid value. For example, if "-" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it may be notified that the output rate is a valid value. Further, the fact that the output rate is an effective value may be notified in a lighting region other than the fourth lighting region 340, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the above-described first form, the payout ratio is notified by displaying the payout ratio on the payout ratio indicator 300 . However, the output rate may be notified by outputting a sound indicating the output rate from the speaker (sound output means) 67 . In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the information on the calculated output rate to the sub-control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the information on the output rate. It will be controlled (voice control). Based on the satisfaction of the display conditions described above, the payout ratio may be displayed on the payout ratio indicator 300 and a sound indicating the payout ratio may be output from the speaker 67, or a voice indicating the payout ratio may be output from the speaker 67. It is also possible to output only

Further, in the above-described first form, the display on the output rate indicator 300 notifies that the output rate is a valid value. However, notification that the output rate is a valid value can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image display device 7 or the sub-liquid crystal display device performs a specific display, the light emitting means such as the board lamp 5 or the frame lamp 66 emits light in a specific light emission mode, or the speaker 67 outputs a specific notification sound. By doing so, it may be notified that the output rate is a valid value.

Further, in the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display device 40 and the display of the payout rate on the payout rate display device 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, by configuring the drive circuit 200X as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, it is possible to display the game information on the game display 40 and display the payout percentage on the payout percentage display device 300 at the same time. You can do it.

Further, in the above-described first form, when the game control state, control processing (specific control processing) related to the variable display of special symbols or control processing (specific control processing) during the control of the jackpot game state is executed. When the output rate is set, the output rate is not calculated (the output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 45) is not executed). However, if the output rate is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when performing control processing (specific control processing) during control in a time saving state, the output rate may not be calculated. . Also, for example, the output rate may not be calculated until the total number of prize balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the above-described first form, the counter for 100 balls and the counter for the number of actual total prize balls are used to measure the total number of prize balls in units of 100 balls. However, in order to measure the total number of prize balls in units of 100 balls, it is not necessary to use two counters (counter for 100 balls, counter for actual total number of prize balls), which can be changed as appropriate. For example, using only the total prize ball counter that measures the total number of prize balls in units of 1 ball, by dividing the value of the total prize ball counter by 100, it is possible to measure the value in units of 100 balls. You can do it. Note that "measurement" means to grasp the quantity for a certain purpose.

Further, in the modification of the first form, if the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, and the base is the reference value. showed that. On the other hand, if the total number of balls shot is 100,000 or more or the number of variations is 3,000 or more, '1' is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the base is a valid value. However, if the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the base is not displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 (that is, the base as a reference value is not displayed), If the total number of shot balls is 100000 or more or the number of variations is 3000 or more, the base may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 . In this case, it is possible for a person who checks the base to judge that the base is a value that has converged to some extent (a valid value), provided that the base is displayed.

Further, in the modified example of the first form, if either the first condition that the total number of balls shot is 100000 or more and the second condition that the number of times of variation is 3000 or more is satisfied, the base is an effective value. showed that However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, then the base may be shown to be a valid value. Alternatively, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the base is a valid value. When only the first condition is provided, the base may be displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. Further, when only the second condition is provided, the base may be displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. Also, the time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on for the first time is measured, and if the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, it is determined that the base is a valid value. It may be shown. Further, it is also possible to indicate that the base is a valid value by a suitable combination of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition.

In addition, in the modification of the first form, in order to determine that the base has converged to some extent and is an effective value, it is determined whether or not the total number of fired balls is 100,000 (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000. A determination was made as to whether or not the number of revolutions was greater than or equal to the number of revolutions (predetermined number of revolutions). However, the value of the total number of shot balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. (Predetermined number of revolutions) or more may be determined.

Further, in the modified example of the first mode, "1" (a specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the base is a valid value. However, the specific number for notifying that the value is valid is not limited to "1", but may be "7" and can be changed as appropriate. Also, it is not necessary to display a number to indicate that the base is a valid value. For example, displaying "-" in the fourth lighting area 340 may indicate that the base is a valid value. Further, the fact that the base is a valid value may be notified in a lighting region other than the fourth lighting region 340, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the base is displayed on the base indicator 300 to notify the player of the base. However, the bass may be notified by outputting a sound indicating the bass from the speaker (sound output means) 67 . In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated base information to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the base information ( voice control). Based on the establishment of the display conditions described above, the bass display 300 may display the bass and the speaker 67 may output the sound indicating the bass, or the speaker 67 may output only the sound indicating the bass. You can do it.

Further, in the modified example of the first form, the display on the base indicator 300 notifies that the base is a valid value. However, notification that the base is a valid value can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image display device 7 or the sub-liquid crystal display device performs a specific display, the light emitting means such as the board lamp 5 or the frame lamp 66 emits light in a specific light emission mode, or the speaker 67 outputs a specific notification sound. This may signal that the base is a valid value.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the base on the base display 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, the drive circuit 200X is configured like the first comparative example shown in FIG. can be

In addition, in the modification of the first form, when the game control state, that is, control processing (specific control processing) related to the variable display of special symbols or control processing during the control of the jackpot game state (specific control processing) is executed, the base is not calculated (the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 66) is not executed). However, if the base is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when performing control processing (specific control processing) during control in a time saving state, the base may not be calculated. Also, for example, the base may not be calculated until the total number of shot balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the modification of the first embodiment, for example, the normal 100 ball counter and the normal shot ball counter are used to measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state in units of 100 balls. However, in order to measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state as one unit of 100 balls, it is not necessary to use two counters (normal 100 ball counter, normal shot ball number counter), which can be changed as appropriate. is. For example, by using only the normal ball counter that measures the number of balls fired in the normal game state in units of 1 ball, the value of the normal ball counter is divided by 100, and the unit of 100 balls is set to 1. may be measured. Note that the number of shot balls in the time-saving state or the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state may also be counted by dividing by 100 using only a counter that measures in units of one ball.

Also, in the above-described first form, the output rate is displayed, and in the modified example of the above-described first form, the base is displayed. However, both the base and the output may be displayed by combining the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of its modification. In this case, one display (display means) may display both the base and the output rate at the same time, or alternatively display the output rate and the base. Alternatively, the base and output may be separately displayed on two separate displays.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is the main control board 80 (see FIG. 6), the rear side cases 401A to 401D (FIGS. 80 to 83) of the main board cases 400A to 400D. ), and placed on the payout control board 110 (FIG. 113). However, the location of the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is not limited to the locations described above, and can be changed as appropriate as long as the view of the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80 is not obstructed. For example, as shown in FIG. 141, it may be arranged on the transparent center cover 55 located at the rearmost position of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. In this case, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 arranged on the central cover 55 may be connected to the connector CN5 of the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC5. The center cover 55 is attached to the game machine frame 50 and protects various control boards and the back unit of the game board 2 from behind.

80 to 83, by moving (rotating or sliding) the rear side cases 401A to 401D, the yield rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 can be moved. moved. However, you may change as follows.

That is, as shown in FIG. 142, a rectangular notch 401a is formed on the left side of the rear side case 401E of the main board case 400E. Vertically extending cylindrical shaft members 401b and 401c are provided on the left and right sides of the notch 401a, respectively. Cylindrical portions 300a and 300b provided at both left and right ends of the yield indicator 300 are inserted through the respective shaft members 401b and 401c so as to be vertically slidable. The output rate display device 300 or the base display device 300 is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC6, and the notch 401a, the shaft members 401b and 401c, and the cylindrical portions 300a and 300b form the moving mechanism portion. corresponds to In this way, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged below the notch 401a in normal times, as shown in FIG. 142(A). However, at this time, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC10 (see FIG. 142(B)) located in front of the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is poor. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(B), by sliding the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 upward with respect to the rear side case 401E, it is possible to secure the visibility of the integrated circuit IC10. . With this configuration, it is possible to move the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 without moving the rear side case 401E. In addition to the modification shown in FIG. 142, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be slid in the horizontal direction or rotated without moving the rear case.

In addition, in the second and third modifications of the third embodiment, the yield indicator 300 is moved horizontally or vertically. However, if the integrated circuit mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be easily seen, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved forward and backward. The output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable in two or more of the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the second and third modifications of the third embodiment, the yield indicator 300 is slid parallel to the mounting surface 80 a of the main control board 80 . That is, the yield indicator 300 was slid in a direction orthogonal to the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a. However, if the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is slid in a direction that intersects the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a, it may be slid not parallel to the mounting surface 80a but inclined.

In addition, in the above-described third embodiment and each modification thereof, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is placed at a non-opposing position (FIGS. 80(C), 81(C), 82(B) and 83(B)). However, as shown in FIG. 142, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable only within a range facing the mounting surface 80a. Also, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be slightly moved within a range not facing the mounting surface 80a.

In addition, in the above-described third embodiment and each modification thereof, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is configured to be movable with respect to the main control board (predetermined member) 80 . However, it is possible to appropriately change to which member the output rate indicator or the base indicator 300 can be moved. For example, the payout rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is placed in the payout board case 500 (see FIG. 7), and the payout rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is moved with respect to the payout control board (predetermined member) 110. It may be configured so that

Further, in the above-described third embodiment and each modification thereof, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is configured to be rotatable or slidable. However, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved by a method other than rotating or sliding. For example, the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is attached to an urging mechanism (moving mechanism) having a spring member, and the yield indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is pressed against the urging force of the spring member. Thus, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved.

Further, in the third embodiment and its first modified example, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the yield indicator 300 is moved (rotated) to a region not facing the mounting surface 80a. However, within the range where the output indicator 300 faces the mounting surface 80a, the output indicator 300 may be moved (rotated, slid, etc.) so that the area facing the mounting surface 80a becomes smaller. In this case, for example, the output indicator 300 is moved from a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where many integrated circuits are mounted to a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where few integrated circuits are mounted. You may make it move. It should be noted that it may be moved with respect to the base display 300 as described above.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on is collated with the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is cut off, and each checksum is matched. If they match, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are retained, and if the checksums do not match, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are erased. However, if the checksum of the game RAM 84 calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum of the game RAM 84 calculated when the power is cut off, it is estimated that the contents stored in the special memory 89 are correct, and the special memory 89 retains the memory contents of On the other hand, if the checksums do not match, it may be assumed that the contents stored in the special memory 89 are incorrect, and the contents stored in the special memory 89 may be erased. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of calculating and collating the checksum of the special memory 89 . In other words, it is possible to easily check whether or not the contents stored in the special memory 89 are correct by utilizing the conventional checksum calculation and verification of the game RAM 84 . As a specific process, instead of the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 43, the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 143 may be executed.

Further, in the above-described first form, if the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on does not match the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is cut off, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are erased. made it However, the memory contents of the special memory 89 may be erased by a special operation to the operating means (for example, pressing the RAM clear switch 152 for 10 seconds when the power is turned on). That is, an operation means for erasing the contents of the special memory 89 may be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are provided as separate storage means. However, as shown in FIG. 144, one game RAM 84a having both a storage area (game area) included in the game RAM 84 and a storage area (special area) included in the special memory 89 may be provided. In this case, when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the memory contents of the game area are erased, but the memory contents of the special area are not erased. Then, the checksum of the game area and the checksum of the special area are separately calculated, and based on the comparison of the checksums of the special area, the storage contents of the special area are retained or deleted. Also good. Alternatively, the checksum of the entire area including the game area and the special area may be calculated, and the storage contents of the special area may be retained or deleted based on the comparison of the checksum.

Further, in the first embodiment, a checksum is used as an error detection code calculated to determine whether or not the contents stored in the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are normal. However, the error detection code is not limited to the checksum, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, by obtaining a parity bit (error detection code) of "0" or "1" in order to maintain the parity of the entire binary data, and collating the data to which the parity bit is added. , it may be determined whether or not the stored contents are normal.

In the above-described first form, the calculation of the output rate is simplified by dividing the total number of prize balls by the value obtained by measuring the total number of prize balls in units of 100 balls. However, the method for simplifying calculation of the output rate is not limited to the above-described method, and for example, the following method may be used.

That is, a role-playing prize ball number counter capable of measuring the number of role-playing prize balls (the number of role-playing prize balls or the number of continuous prize-balls) as, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information, and the total prize balls A total number of winning balls counter capable of measuring the number as, for example, 32-bit information is prepared. When calculating the winning rate, first, the digits of the 32-bit information counted by the total winning ball counter are searched for the significant digit "1" from the upper digits. Next, information of, for example, 16 bits (second bit range) is extracted from the digit (significant digit) where the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of winning balls is created. Subsequently, information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the total number of prize balls produced is extracted from the 32-bit information counted by the prize ball number counter. For example, if the information from the 14th to the 30th digits is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter, the 32-bit information measured by the prize ball counter Information from the 14th digit to the 30th digit is extracted from the information. In this way, 16-bit information of the number of bonus balls operated is created. Then, by dividing the 16-bit information of the number of bonus balls operated by the 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls, the output rate is calculated. With this method, it is possible to simplify the calculation of the output rate (reduce the processing load) by dividing by 16-bit information instead of dividing by 32-bit information. If the method is to simply extract 16-bit information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct output rate value will be large when the total number of winning balls is relatively small, such as 1,000 shots. In this method, 16-bit information is extracted from significant digits. It is also possible to reduce the error from the correct yield value.

In addition, in the modification of the first embodiment, for example, the total number of prize balls in the normal game state is divided by the value obtained by measuring the number of shot balls in the normal game state in units of 100 balls. Simplified base calculation. However, the method for simplifying the calculation of the base is not limited to the method described above, and may be, for example, the following method.

That is, a total prize ball counter capable of measuring the total number of prize balls as, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information, and a total number of shot ball counter capable of measuring, for example, the total number of shot balls as 32-bit information. prepare. When calculating the base, first, among the 32-bit information counted by the total number of shot balls counter, the significant digit "1" is searched from the upper digits. Next, information of, for example, 16 bits (second bit range) is extracted from the digit (significant digit) where the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of shot balls is created. Subsequently, information corresponding to the 16-bit digits of the total number of shot balls produced is extracted from the 32-bit information counted by the total prize-ball counter. For example, if the information from the 14th to the 30th digits is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total number of shot balls counter, the 32-bit information measured by the total number of awarded balls counter is extracted. Information from the 14th digit to the 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information on the total number of winning balls is created. Then, the base is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the total number of awarded balls by the 16-bit information of the total number of shot balls. With this method, it is possible to simplify the base calculation (reduce the processing load) by dividing by 16-bit information instead of dividing by 32-bit information. If the method were to simply extract 16-bit information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct base value would become large when the total number of shots fired is relatively small, such as 1,000 shots. With this method, since it is a method of extracting 16-bit information from significant digits, even if the total number of shot balls is relatively large such as 100,000 shots or relatively small such as 1,000 shots, , it is possible to reduce the error from the correct base value.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the measured values for display of output rate (total number of prize balls, number of bonus balls activated) stored in the game RAM 84A and the values stored in the special memory 89A (S027), and if the measured values for output rate display do not match (NO in S027), the measurement values for output rate display stored in the special memory 89A are collated (S027). The value was transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). However, if the values of the payout ratio display measurement values do not match, the payout ratio display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A are reset, and the payout ratio display measurement values stored in the special memory 89A are reset. It is also possible to reset the value. Alternatively, without performing the collation described above, when the power is turned on, the measured value for displaying the pay rate stored in the special memory 89A may be transferred to the game RAM 84A. It should be noted that, in the modified example of the second embodiment, it is of course possible to replace the aforementioned measured value for output display with the measured value for base display.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and its modification, an external display device (external power display device 900 or external base display device 900) is attached to the connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80, and the external display device It is now possible to display the rate or base on the . However, the connecting portion for attaching the external display device may be provided in a portion other than the main control board 80, and may be provided in the payout control board 110, the game board 2, and the game machine frame 50, for example. Also, the structure of the connecting portion is not limited to the connector, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, the output rate or base is displayed on the external display device attached to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80. FIG. However, without displaying the output rate or base on the external display device, the output rate (character ratio, continuous character ratio) or base (normal base, short time base, jackpot base) is within the normal range due to the aspect of the light emitting means. It is also possible to notify only whether or not there is.

Further, in the sixth and seventh forms and their modifications, if the output rate or the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode (first mode), and the output rate or the base is outside the normal range. If so, the special LED 350 is set to the flashing mode (second mode). However, the aspect of the special LED 350 can be changed as appropriate, and if the output rate or base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 will be in a blinking mode or an extinguished mode, and if the output rate or base is outside the normal range, the special LED 350 will be lit. A mode or a light-off mode may be used. Also, when it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, the main control board 80 may stop the game control (main control main process). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing any more games. Also, when it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, an abnormal signal is sent from the external terminal plate provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to an external device (eg, data counter) other than the pachinko game machine 1. You may make it output. As a result, it is possible for the external device to which the abnormality signal is input to notify the abnormality in the output rate or the base.

Further, in the sixth form, the preconditions that the total number of prize balls is 10000 (predetermined number of prize balls) or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times (predetermined number of rotations) or more are satisfied, and the delivery rate exceeds the predetermined value. If so, the special LED 350 is in a flashing mode. However, the above preconditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, the preconditions may be that the total number of prize balls is 30,000 or more, or that the number of fluctuations is 10,000 or more. In other words, the value of the predetermined number of winning balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions can be changed as appropriate. The value of the predetermined number of winning balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations are not set at the time of manufacturing the pachinko game machine 1, and may be arbitrarily set by, for example, an employee of the hall (game hall). good. Alternatively, only the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the precondition that the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, may be used. Also, the preconditions may be that the total number of prize balls is 10000 (predetermined number of prize balls) or more and the number of fluctuations is 3000 times (predetermined number of revolutions) or more. Alternatively, the precondition may not be set.

In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments and their modifications, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is arranged on the main control board 80. . However, the location of the special LEDs 350 is not limited to the main control board 80 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special LED 350 may be arranged on the payout control board 110 . In this case, the main control board 80 sends the result of the payout rate (character ratio, continuous character ratio) or base (normal base, short time base, jackpot base) to the payout control board 110 as a command. As a result, the CPU of the payout control board 110 determines whether the payout rate is within the normal range based on the reception of the command, or determines whether the base is within the normal range. Then, the payout control microcomputer 116 may change the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. In this way, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform abnormality determination of the output rate and base abnormality, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 .

Alternatively, the special LED 350 may be arranged on the effect control board such as the sub control board 90 . In this case, for example, the output rate or base result is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 as a command. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs abnormality determination of the output rate or abnormality determination of the base based on the command. And you may make it the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control change the light emission mode of special LED350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. In this way, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform abnormality determination of the output rate and base abnormality, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 .

In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments and their modifications, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 is newly provided to indicate whether the output rate or the base is abnormal. Means (the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5) may be used to indicate whether the output rate or the base is abnormal. Also, the abnormality notification means for indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be the image display device 7 (display means) or the speaker 67 (sound output means). When the image display device 7 is used as the abnormality notification means, it is sufficient to display a special image on the image display device 7 to indicate that the output rate or the base is abnormal. If the speaker 67 is used as the abnormality notification means, it is sufficient to output a special sound from the speaker 67 to indicate that the output rate or base is abnormal.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the specified values (70%, 60%) for determining that the output rate is abnormal can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in the modification of the sixth form, the range for determining that the base is within the normal range (30% to 39% for normal base, 84% to 99% for short time base, 600% for jackpot base ~800%) can also be changed as appropriate. Also, in the seventh embodiment, each value of the simple abnormality determination table (see FIG. 100) for determining whether the output rate is substantially abnormal can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, each value of each simple abnormality determination table (see FIGS. 105A, 105B, and 105C) for determining whether the base is substantially abnormal is It can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the value of the number of fired balls (determined It was the same as the value of the number of fired balls (determined number of fired balls) when judging whether the number of prize balls was smaller than the normal lower limit. However, the value of the number of shot balls when judging whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit and the number of shot balls when judging whether the total number of prize balls is smaller than the normal lower limit may be set to be different from each other. In addition, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, both the magnitude judgment of whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the magnitude judgment of whether the total number of prize balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value are performed. I went, but you can do just one of them.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated based on the prize ball command (entrance ball information) transmitted from the main control board 80 . However, based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 aside from the prize ball command, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls activated. In this case, the above-described command includes information that enables determination of which winning slot the player has won. The ball entry information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 as a result of the game ball entering the winning hole, and is not limited to the winning timing of the game ball, and may be transmitted at any timing after the winning timing. You can do so.

Further, in the modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the prize ball command (entered ball information) transmitted from the main control board 80 . However, based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. In this case, the above-described command includes information that can be used to determine which entrance the ball has entered. In addition, the ball entry information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 as a result of the game ball entering the ball entrance, and is not limited to the timing of the entry of the game ball, but any time after the entry timing. You may make it transmit with timing.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated. However, a control board other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls activated. For example, the main control board 80 transmits to the sub-control board 90 a command capable of determining the prize-winning opening, and the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command, Along with measuring, calculation of output rate is also performed. Even if the sub-control board 90 transmits a command indicating the calculated output rate to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the output rate on the image display device (display means) 7 good. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 . Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device such as the output rate display device 300, it is possible to easily display the output rate.

In short, the processing for measuring the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls activated (the number of prize balls counter addition processing (S114)) and the processing for calculating the output rate (output rate calculation process (S117)) and the process for displaying the output rate (output rate display process (S2304)) may be executed by separate control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modified example of the eighth form, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. However, a control board other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits to the sub-control board 90 a command capable of determining the entrance into which the ball has entered, and the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command, determines the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. Performs measurement and base calculation. Then, the sub-control board 90 may transmit a command indicating the calculation result of the base to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may display the base on the image display device (display means) 7 . By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 . Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device such as the base display device 300, it is possible to easily realize the display of the base.

In short, the processing for measuring the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls (counter addition processing (S151)), the processing for calculating the base (base calculation processing (S152)), and the processing for displaying the base (base display processing (S2340)) may be executed by separate control boards, and their combination can be changed as appropriate.

In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit section 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs. However, if it is possible to switch between the game display state and the output rate display state, or if it is possible to switch between the game display state and the base display state, the configuration of the switch circuit section can be changed as appropriate. For example, the switch circuit section may be composed of either an N-type MOSFET or a P-type MOSFET. Also, the switch circuit section may be configured using other types of transistors such as JFETs instead of using MOSFETs.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments and their modifications, the output levels (“L” level or “H” level) of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 have been described as appropriate. , XCSE1, XCSE10 can of course be implemented differently. The output levels of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 are set in the output process (S107) (performance display process (S2304), game display process (S2303), base display process (S2340)). It may be executed as a function that the microcomputer 81 has in advance and not executed as the output process (S107).

In addition, in each of the above-described forms and modifications thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 stores programs stored in the ROM 83 (delivery calculation processing (S117), delivery rate display processing (S2304), base display processing ( S2340), etc.), calculation of pay rate, display of pay rate, calculation of base, and display of base were executed. However, a ROM separate from the ROM 83 storing a program relating to the progress of the game (main control main processing) is provided, and calculation of pay rate, display of pay rate, calculation of base, and display of base are executed in the separate ROM. A program for doing so may be stored. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 may perform calculation of the payout rate, display of the payout rate, calculation of the base, and display of the base based on a program stored in a ROM different from the ROM 83 .

Further, in each of the above-described forms, both the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio can be displayed on the payout ratio indicator 300 as the payout ratio. However, only one of the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio may be displayed on the payout rate indicator 300 .

In addition, in the modifications of the above embodiments, the number of balls entering each winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) is In addition to counting, by counting the number of balls entering the out port 16, the total number of shot balls is counted. However, the total number of shot balls may be counted as follows.

As shown in FIG. 145, an out port discharge route HK extends from the out port 16 to the outside of the game area 3, a first start port discharge route H1 extends from the first start port 20 to the outside of the game region 3, A second starting opening discharge path H2 extends from the second starting opening 21 to the outside of the game area 3, a first large winning opening discharge path H3 extends from the first large winning opening 30 to the outside of the gaming area 3, and a second large winning opening discharge path H3 extends to the outside of the game area 3. A second large winning opening discharge path H4 extends from the winning opening 35 to the outside of the game area 3, and a normal winning opening discharging path H5 extends from the normal winning opening 27 to the outside of the game area 3. - 特許庁These discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5 all communicate with the total discharge route HX. The total discharge route HX is provided with a discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting game balls flowing from the respective discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5. A detection signal from the outlet sensor 16b is input to the main control board 80. As shown in FIG. Thus, by counting the detection by the total discharge port sensor 16b, the number of all game balls discharged out of the game area 3 can be counted. That is, it is possible to count the total number of shot balls.

It should be noted that instead of the total discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting game balls that have flowed in from all the discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5 described above, some discharge routes (for example, discharge routes HK, H1 , H2) can be used to count the total number of shot balls. Also, without using the method of counting the number of game balls discharged outside the game area 3, a sensor that can directly detect the game balls that are shot toward the game area 3 is provided (for example, near the rail member 4). A sensor may be provided in the ball) to count the total number of shot balls.

In addition, in each of the above forms and its modifications, the output rate (specific percentage value), which is the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated with the function, is displayed, or the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls is displayed. The base (specific percentage value) is displayed. However, the specific percentage value is not limited to the output rate or the base, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is the ratio between a certain number of first specific game balls and a certain second number of specific game balls. For example, as a specific percentage value, the ratio of the number of balls entering the first starting port 20 (first number of specific game balls) and the number of balls entering the first big winning hole 30 (second number of specific game balls) Or, it is the ratio of the number of balls entering the first start port 20 (the number of first specific game balls) and the number of balls entering the second start port 21 (the number of the second specific game balls), or It may be a ratio between the number of balls entering the winning opening 27 (the first number of specific game balls) and the number of balls entering all the winning holes (the second number of specific gaming balls). Also, for example, an out ratio value (specific ratio value), which is a ratio of the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls (specific game ball number), may be displayed. Note that the number of out balls is the number of game balls that enter the out hole 16 without winning in any of the winning holes. In the out ratio value, if the value of the total number of winning balls is abnormally large with respect to the number of out balls, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of giving unfair benefits to the player, and there is illegal modification, malfunction, or malfunction. can be determined to have occurred. On the other hand, if the value of the total number of winning balls is abnormally small with respect to the number of out balls, the pachinko game machine 1 has too few benefits that can be given to the player, and there is an illegal remodeling, malfunction, or malfunction. It is possible to judge that Instead of the out ratio value, which is the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls, the out ratio value, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to a specific winning hole and the number of out balls, is displayed. Also good.

Moreover, in the modified examples of the above embodiments, a base that is not related to time is calculated and displayed. However, the base at a predetermined time may be calculated and displayed. For example, an hourly base (short-time ball payout rate) may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the one-hour base exceeds 300%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. Further, for example, the base (ball payout rate during the middle time period) in 10 hours may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the 10 hour base is less than 50% or greater than 200%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments and modifications thereof, the output rate or the base is displayed, but as shown below, a value (specific index value) serving as an index for judging an abnormality of the gaming machine may be displayed. . For example, the number of winnings (specific index value) for each winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) per predetermined time may be displayed. In this case, if the number of winnings to a specific winning slot is extremely high or low compared to the number of winnings to other winning slots, it may be determined that there has been an illegal modification, malfunction, or malfunction. It is possible. Alternatively, only the total number of prize balls (number of payout balls) may be displayed. In this case, for example, a person who sees the total number of winning balls per minute calculates the base for the total number of balls fired (approximately 60 balls per minute) and judges illegal modification, malfunction, or malfunction. You can do it. Alternatively, only the number of out balls may be displayed. In this case, for example, if the number of out-balls per minute (predetermined time) exceeds 60, or if the number of out-balls per minute is extremely low, unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction will occur. It is possible to determine that

Further, in each of the above embodiments and their modifications, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are obtained as the random numbers (entrance information) obtained based on the winning of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. However, one random number may be acquired and based on the random number, whether or not the jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern may be determined. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers to be obtained based on the starting prize and what is determined in each random number.

Further, in each of the above embodiments and its modifications, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a game machine controlled to a high probability state based on passing through the specific area 39), but the high probability state is entered based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a game machine in which the transition of is determined. Also, in each of the above forms, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a game machine that cuts the number of times with a variable probability), but once it is controlled to a high probability state, the game machine continues to be controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot game starts ( It may be configured as a so-called variable loop type game machine).

Moreover, in each form and its modification, the variation of the special figure 2 is configured to be executed with priority over the variation of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the variation of the special figure 2 and the variation of the special figure 1 may be configured to be executed according to the winning order to the starting port. In this case, a storage area capable of storing the sum of the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation is provided in the game RAM 84, and the winning ball information is stored in the memory area according to the order of winning, and the one with the earliest memory order is stored. It may be configured to be digested from Also, it may be configured so that the variation of the special figure 1 can be executed even during the variation of the special figure 2, and the variation of the special figure 2 can be performed even during the variation of the special figure 1. In other words, it may be configured as a game machine that performs so-called simultaneous variation. Also, it may be configured as a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine, or a honeycomb type game machine. That is, the present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines with various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the gaming machine.

Of course, it is possible to combine the features of the above embodiments and the features of the modified examples, or remove some of them.

12. Inventions Shown in the Above-described Embodiments Each of the above-mentioned forms and modifications thereof shows inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, corresponding structural names and expressions in each of the above modes and modifications thereof, and reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

The invention according to means 1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A game display (40) capable of displaying game information based on the control processing of the game control means,
The game display includes a first light emitting region (410) having a plurality of (for example, 8) light emitting units (game light emitting units LA1 to LA8) and a plurality of (for example, 8) light emitting units (for example, game light emitting units LA9 to LA16). ) and at least a second light emitting region (420) having
a light emission selection circuit section (210) capable of selecting a light emission region that can be lighted out of the light emission regions of the game display device based on a signal (data information D[0...3]) input from the game control means; ,
a light emission driving circuit section (220) capable of emitting light from each light emitting section of the light emitting region selected by the light emission selection circuit section based on a signal (data information D[0...7]) input from the game control means; with
a first light emission common line (first common signal line A1) connecting the light emission selection circuit section and each light emitting section of the first light emitting region;
at least a second light emission common line (second common signal line A2) connecting the light emission selection circuit portion and each light emitting portion of the second light emitting region;
A plurality of (for example, 8) data lines (data signal lines Aa to Ah) connected to the light emission driving circuit unit are connected to each light emitting unit of the first light emitting region and each light emitting unit of the second light emitting region. At least in the connected gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific display device (output rate indicator 300, base indicator 300),
The specific indicator comprises a first lighting region (310) having a plurality of (for example, 8) lighting portions (LB1 to LB8) and a second lighting region (320) having a plurality of lighting portions (LB9 to LB16). at least prepare
A lighting selection circuit unit (210, 230) capable of selecting a lighting region that can be lit from among the lighting regions of the specific indicator based on the signal (data information D[0...3]) input from the game control means , 250) and
a first lighting common line (first common signal line B1) connecting the lighting selection circuit section and each lighting section of the first lighting region;
at least a second lighting common line (second common signal line B2) connecting the lighting selection circuit section and each lighting section of the second lighting region;
A plurality of (for example, 8) branch data lines (data signal lines Ba to Bh) branching from each of the data lines are provided at least in each lighting section of the first lighting area and each lighting section of the second lighting area. connected and
The game control means is
A game display state in which the light emission selection circuit section selects a light emission area that can be emitted by the light emission selection circuit section by a signal (select signal XCSE0 or select signal XCSE10) output to the light emission selection circuit section or the lighting selection circuit section, or the lighting selection circuit section is switchable to a specific display state (output rate display state, base display state) for selecting a lighting area that can be lit.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the signal output from the light emission selection circuit section is transmitted through the light emission common line (first light emission common line, second light emission common line) to each light emission area (second 1 luminous area, 2nd luminous area). Further, the signal output from the lighting selection circuit section is transmitted through the lighting common line (first lighting common line, second lighting common line) to each lighting region (first lighting region, second lighting region) of the specific indicator. ). Signals output from the light emission drive circuit unit are transmitted to each light emitting unit of each light emitting area of the game display device via a plurality of data lines, and are transmitted to specific display signals via a plurality of branch data lines. It is transmitted to each lighting section of each lighting region of the device. In this circuit, the game control means can display game information on the game display device by switching to the game display state by a signal output to the light emission selection circuit section or the lighting selection circuit section. By switching, it is possible to display a specific ratio value on a specific indicator. In this way, the addition of the lighting selection circuit section and the software control output by the game control means make the circuit configuration simpler than the case where both the selection circuit section and the drive circuit section for displaying the specific ratio value are added. It is possible to alternatively display the game information and display the specific percentage value.

The invention according to means 2 is
In the gaming machine according to means 1,
The game control means is capable of outputting a specific select signal (select signal XCSE10) that takes either one of a first level ("H" level) and a second level ("L" level),
When the output level of the specific select signal is the first level, the first signal line (signal transmission line S1) connecting the game control means and the light emission selection circuit section is brought into a conductive state to control the game. While making the second signal line (signal transmission line S11) connecting the means and the lighting selection circuit section non-conducting,
A switch circuit unit is provided that makes the second signal line conductive and the first signal line non-conductive when the output level of the specific select signal is the second level. It is a gaming machine that

According to the game machine having this configuration, when the game control means sets the output level of the specific select signal to the first level, the first signal line connecting the game control means and the light emission selection circuit section is brought into a conducting state by the switch circuit section. become. As a result, the game display state is entered, and the game information can be displayed on the game display. On the other hand, if the game control means sets the output level of the specific select signal to the second level, the second signal line connecting the game control means and the lighting selection circuit section is brought into a conducting state by the switch circuit section. As a result, the specific display state is entered, and the specific ratio value can be displayed on the specific display device. In this way, it is possible to realize switching between the display of the game information and the display of the specific percentage value by using the switch circuit section.

The invention according to means 3 is
In the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
a game machine frame (50) having an outer frame (51) forming an outer shell and an inner frame (52) openable and closable with respect to the outer frame;
frame open detection means (frame open detection switch 50a) capable of detecting the opening of the inner frame,
The specific display device is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine frame,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means sets the specific display state on condition that at least detection by the frame opening detection means is made.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the inner frame is open, the specific indicator on the back side of the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized, and the specific percentage value displayed on the specific indicator can be confirmed. be. On the other hand, if the inner frame is closed, the specific display on the back side of the gaming machine frame cannot be seen, and the specific ratio value is not displayed on the specific display. In this way, it is possible to make it possible to check the specific ratio value only when the specific indicator is visible.

The invention according to means 4 is
In the gaming machine according to means 3,
Equipped with a ball entrance (first start port 20, second start port 21) into which a game ball can enter,
The game control means is
Ball entry information acquisition means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing steps S206 and S210) for acquiring ball entry information (various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance;
Hit determination means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing steps S1402 and S1408) for determining whether a hit is a big hit based on the entered ball information acquired by the entered ball information acquisition means;
Identification symbol control means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing steps S1406, S1412, and S1306) capable of variably displaying identification symbols (special symbols) indicating the result of the hit determination and then stopping display;
a jackpot game executing means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing step S1307) capable of executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot stop mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. prepared,
On the condition that there is a detection by the frame open detection means, the variable display of the identification pattern is not executed, and the jackpot game is not executed (the customer waiting flag is ON). This game machine is characterized by being in a specific display state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the inner frame is open, it is possible that a game ball enters the ball entrance and the variable display of identification symbols starts. Therefore, according to the gaming machine with this configuration, the opening of the inner frame alone does not switch to the specific display state, and the condition is that the inner frame is opened and the state of waiting for customers is set as a condition to switch to the output rate display state. That is, in the rare case that the variable display of identification symbols is started while the inner frame is open, the game display state is entered. In this way, even in the rare case described above, it is possible to prevent the function of displaying the game information from being lost.

The invention according to means 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The specific indicator indicates, as the specific percentage value, a base (normal base, time-saving base, This game machine is characterized by being able to display a jackpot base).

According to the game machine of this configuration, by checking the base displayed on the specific display, even an employee of the game hall can easily judge whether the game machine has a failure or malfunction. It is possible to do

The invention according to means 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The above-mentioned specific display indicates, as the above-mentioned specific percentage value, the output rate (character ratio, continuous character ratio ) can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, by confirming the output rate displayed on the specific display device, it is easy to determine whether the rate is significantly different from the reference value (60% or 70%) cleared when inspected in advance. It is possible to judge

It should be noted that "establishment of a predetermined control condition" in this specification means that a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed. is.

1... Pachinko game machine 80... Main control board 80a... Mounting surface 81... Game control microcomputer 300... Output indicator, base indicator 300a, 300b... Cylindrical part 400A to 400E... Main board case 401A to 401E... Rear side case 401a... Notches 401b, 401c... Shaft member IC9... Integrated circuit

Claims (1)

a main board that can affect the outcome of the game;
and a specific control means mounted on the main board,
The main substrate is
and a specific display capable of displaying a specific ratio value, which is the ratio between the number of first specific game balls and the number of second specific game balls.

Images